1 % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
3 % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
4 \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname
\endcsname\relax\input plain
\fi
6 \def\texinfoversion{2016-
02-
09.12}
8 % Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
9 % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
10 % 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016
11 % Free Software Foundation, Inc.
13 % This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
14 % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
15 % published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
16 % License, or (at your option) any later version.
18 % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
19 % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
20 % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
21 % General Public License for more details.
23 % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
24 % along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
26 % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
27 % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
28 % restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7
29 % of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3").
31 % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
32 % reports; you can get the latest version from:
33 % http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or
34 % http://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or
35 % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page)
36 % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
37 % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
39 % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
40 % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
41 % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
43 % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
44 % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
45 % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
50 % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
51 % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
52 % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
53 % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
55 % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
56 % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
57 % full Texinfo distribution.
59 % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
62 \message{Loading texinfo
[version
\texinfoversion]:
}
64 % If in a .fmt file, print the version number
65 % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
66 % they might have appeared in the input file name.
67 \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version
\texinfoversion]}%
68 \catcode`+=
\active \catcode`
\_=
\active}
72 % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
73 % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
76 % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
78 \let\ptexbullet=
\bullet
86 \let\ptexfootnote=
\footnote
90 \let\ptexindent=
\indent
91 \let\ptexinsert=
\insert
94 \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
95 \let\ptexnoindent=
\noindent
97 \let\ptexraggedright=
\raggedright
105 {\catcode`\'=
\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'
}% active in plain's math mode
107 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
108 % starts a new line in the output.
111 % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
112 % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
114 \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
115 \let\linenumber =
\empty % Pre-3.0.
117 \def\linenumber{l.
\the\inputlineno:
\space}
120 % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
121 \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix
}\fi
122 \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter
}\fi
123 \ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error
}\fi
124 \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file
}\fi
125 \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in
}\fi
126 \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)
}\fi
127 \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)
}\fi
128 \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info
}\fi
129 \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of
}\fi
130 \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on
}\fi
131 \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title
}\fi
132 \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of
}\fi
133 \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on
}\fi
134 \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page
}\fi
135 \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section
}\fi
136 \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section
}\fi
137 \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see
}\fi
138 \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See
}\fi
139 \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents
}\fi
140 \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents
}\fi
142 \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January
}\fi
143 \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February
}\fi
144 \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March
}\fi
145 \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April
}\fi
146 \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May
}\fi
147 \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June
}\fi
148 \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July
}\fi
149 \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August
}\fi
150 \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September
}\fi
151 \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October
}\fi
152 \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November
}\fi
153 \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December
}\fi
155 \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro
}\fi
156 \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form
}\fi
157 \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable
}\fi
158 \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option
}\fi
159 \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function
}\fi
161 % Give the space character the catcode for a space.
162 \def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =
10\relax}
164 \chardef\dashChar = `\-
165 \chardef\slashChar = `\/
166 \chardef\underChar = `
\_
172 % The following is used inside several \edef's.
173 \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
177 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
178 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
179 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
180 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
181 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
183 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
184 wide-spread wrap-around
187 % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
188 % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
189 % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
190 % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
191 % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
193 \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs =
1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
197 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
202 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
203 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging
210 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
214 % @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things
215 % aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message,
218 \def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg}
219 \def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}}
221 % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
222 % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
224 \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<
10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<
\smallskipamount
225 \removelastskip\penalty-
50\smallskip\fi\fi}
226 \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<
10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<
\medskipamount
227 \removelastskip\penalty-
100\medskip\fi\fi}
228 \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<
10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<
\bigskipamount
229 \removelastskip\penalty-
200\bigskip\fi\fi}
234 % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
235 % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
236 % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
238 \def\finalout{\overfullrule=
0pt
}
240 % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
243 \let\cropmarks =
\cropmarkstrue
245 % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
246 % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
248 \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
249 \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=
1pc
250 \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=
.3pt
251 \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=
.75in
253 % Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
254 % We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
255 % This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
257 % A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
258 % \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
260 % Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
261 % (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
262 % of a page, or that at the bottom of a page.
264 % \domark is called twice inside \chapmacro, to add one
265 % mark before the section break, and one after.
266 % In the second call \prevchapterdefs is the same as \lastchapterdefs,
267 % and \prevsectiondefs is the same as \lastsectiondefs.
268 % Then if the page is not broken at the mark, some of the previous
269 % section appears on the page, and we can get the name of this section
270 % from \firstmark for @everyheadingmarks top.
271 % @everyheadingmarks bottom uses \botmark.
273 % See page 260 of The TeXbook.
275 \toks0=
\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
276 \toks2=
\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
277 \toks4=
\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
278 \toks6=
\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
279 \toks8=
\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
281 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: marks for @everyheadingmarks top
282 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: for @everyheadingmarks bottom
283 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks
287 % \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks,
288 % \getcolormarks - extract needed part of mark.
290 % \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
291 % page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
292 % the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
293 % @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
295 \def\gettopheadingmarks{%
297 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
299 \def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
300 \def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi}
302 % Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
303 \def\lastchapterdefs{}
304 \def\lastsectiondefs{}
306 \def\prevchapterdefs{}
307 \def\prevsectiondefs{}
310 % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
311 \newdimen\bindingoffset
312 \newdimen\normaloffset
313 \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
315 % Main output routine.
318 \output =
{\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
323 % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.
324 % \shipout a vbox for a single page, adding an optional header, footer,
325 % cropmarks, and footnote. This also causes index entries for this page
326 % to be written to the auxiliary files.
329 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=
0pt
\else \hoffset=
\normaloffset \fi
331 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by
\bindingoffset
332 \else \advance\hoffset by -
\bindingoffset\fi
334 % Common context changes for both heading and footing.
335 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
336 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
337 \def\commmonheadfootline{\let\hsize=
\pagewidth \texinfochars}
339 % Retrieve the information for the headings from the marks in the page,
340 % and call Plain TeX's \makeheadline and \makefootline, which use the
341 % values in \headline and \footline.
343 % This is used to check if we are on the first page of a chapter.
345 \let\prevchaptername\thischaptername
346 \ifcase0\firstmark\fi
347 \let\curchaptername\thischaptername
349 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
350 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
352 \ifx\curchaptername\prevchaptername
353 \let\thischapterheading\thischapter
355 % \thischapterheading is the same as \thischapter except it is blank
356 % for the first page of a chapter. This is to prevent the chapter name
358 \def\thischapterheading{}%
361 \global\setbox\headlinebox =
\vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makeheadline}%
362 \global\setbox\footlinebox =
\vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makefootline}%
365 % Set context for writing to auxiliary files like index files.
366 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
367 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
368 % before the \shipout runs.
370 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
371 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
372 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
373 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
374 % \entry{{\indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
375 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
377 % {\code {{\backslashcurfont }acronym}
379 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
380 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name
{\the\pageno} xyz
\fi
382 \ifcropmarks \vbox to
\outervsize\bgroup
384 \vskip-
\topandbottommargin
386 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
389 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
391 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
394 \vskip\topandbottommargin
396 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
397 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
403 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox >
0pt
404 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
405 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
406 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
412 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
413 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
414 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
415 \boxmaxdepth =
\cornerthick
418 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
420 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
423 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
425 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
427 }% end of \shipout\vbox
428 }% end of group with \indexdummies
430 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-
20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
433 \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=
\maxdimen
435 % Main part of page, including any footnotes
436 \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to
\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=
\maxdepth #1}}
438 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
439 % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
440 \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
441 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to
\z@
{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
442 \dimen@=
\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
443 \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
444 \ifr@ggedbottom
\kern-
\dimen@
\vfil \fi}
447 % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
448 % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
449 % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
451 \def\ewtop{\vrule height
\cornerthick depth0pt width
\cornerlong}
453 {\hrule height
\cornerthick depth
\cornerlong width
\cornerthick}}
454 \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth
\cornerthick width
\cornerlong}
456 {\hrule height
\cornerlong depth
\cornerthick width
\cornerthick}}
461 % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
462 % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
463 % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
464 % For example, \def\foo{\parsearg\fooxxx}.
466 \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
467 \def\parseargusing#1#2{%
473 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
477 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M
{%
478 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
479 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
483 % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. Also remove a @texinfoc
484 % comment (see \scanmacro for details). Pass the result on to \argcheckspaces.
485 \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
486 \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argremovetexinfoc #1\texinfoc\ArgTerm}
487 \def\argremovetexinfoc#1\texinfoc#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M
\ArgTerm}
489 % Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
491 % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
492 % @end itemize @c foo
493 % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
494 % by \finishparsearg.
496 \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M
{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M
}
497 \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M
{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M
}
498 \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M
#2\^^M
#3\ArgTerm{%
501 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
502 \let\temp\finishparsearg
504 \let\temp\argcheckspaces
506 % Put the space token in:
510 % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
511 % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
512 % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
513 % just before passing the control to \argtorun.
514 % (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
515 % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
516 % that a pair of braces would be stripped.
518 % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
520 \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
523 % \parseargdef - define a command taking an argument on the line
525 % \parseargdef\foo{...}
526 % is roughly equivalent to
527 % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
530 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
532 \def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
537 % Several utility definitions with active space:
542 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
543 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
544 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
545 % should produce a line of output anyway.
547 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =
\tie}
549 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
550 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
551 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
552 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =
\space}
556 \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next#
#1{}\else \let\next=
\relax \fi \next}
558 % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
563 % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
564 % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
565 % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
566 % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
567 % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
569 % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
570 % are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The
571 % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
575 % At run-time, environments start with this:
576 \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
580 % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
581 \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
582 \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
584 % Check whether we're in the right environment:
593 % Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
596 \errmessage{This command can appear only
\inenvironment\temp,
597 not
\inenvironment\thisenv}%
599 \def\inenvironment#1{%
601 outside of any environment
%
603 in environment
\expandafter\string#1%
607 % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
608 % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
611 \if 1\csname iscond.
#1\endcsname
613 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal.
614 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
615 \csname E
#1\endcsname
620 \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.
}
623 % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
624 % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
625 % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
626 % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
627 % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
629 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
630 % if the definition is written into an index file.
631 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
632 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\
}
635 % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
636 \def\:
{\spacefactor=
1000 }
638 % @* forces a line break.
639 \def\*
{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
641 % @/ allows a line break.
644 % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
645 \def\.
{.
\spacefactor=
\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
647 % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
648 \def\!
{!
\spacefactor=
\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
650 % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
651 \def\?
{?
\spacefactor=
\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
653 % @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
658 \parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
660 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
661 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
664 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `
\temp', must be on|off
}%
668 % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
669 % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
670 % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
671 \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
673 % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
674 % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
675 % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
676 % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
677 % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
678 % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
679 % the text is small, which looks bad.
681 % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
682 % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
683 % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
684 % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
685 % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
686 % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
692 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=
\active \else
693 \errhelp =
\groupinvalidhelp
694 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled
}%
698 \setbox\groupbox =
\vtop\bgroup
699 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
700 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
701 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
702 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
703 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
704 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
708 % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
709 % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
710 % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
711 % above. But it's pretty close.
713 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
714 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
715 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
716 \global\dimen1 =
\prevdepth
717 \egroup % End the \vtop.
724 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
725 \dimen0 =
\ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by
\dp\groupbox
726 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
727 \dimen2 =
\pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -
\pagetotal
728 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
729 % group, force a page break.
730 \ifdim \dimen0 >
\dimen2
731 \ifdim \pagetotal <
\vfilllimit\pageheight
739 % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
740 % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
742 \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
743 group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J
%
744 where each line of input produces a line of output.
}
746 % @need space-in-mils
747 % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
749 \newdimen\mil \mil=
0.001in
752 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
756 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
758 \dimen2 =
\ht\strutbox
759 \advance\dimen2 by
\dp\strutbox
760 \ifdim\dimen0 >
\dimen2
762 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
763 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
764 % And a page break here is fine.
765 \vtop to
#1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
767 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
768 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
769 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
770 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
771 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
773 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
774 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
775 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
776 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
777 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
778 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
779 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
782 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
785 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
790 % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
794 % @page forces the start of a new page.
796 \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
799 % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
801 % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
802 % That's how much \exdent should take out.
803 \newskip\exdentamount
805 % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
806 \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -
\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
808 % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
809 \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -
\exdentamount
810 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
812 % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
813 % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
814 % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual.
816 \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=
1cm
817 \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
819 \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
822 \vtop to
\strutdepth{%
823 \baselineskip=
\strutdepth
825 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
826 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
828 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
830 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
835 \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l
}
836 \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r
}
838 % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
839 % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
840 % else use TEXT for both).
842 \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,
\finish}
843 \def\parseinmargin#1,
#2,
#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
844 \setbox0 =
\hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
846 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
849 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
854 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
856 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
861 % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
862 % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
863 % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
864 % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
865 % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). This command
866 % is not documented, not supported, and doesn't work.
869 % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
872 % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
874 % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
875 % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
878 % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
879 % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
882 % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
883 \vrule height
\baselineskip width1pt
885 % This is the space between the bar and the text.
891 % @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
893 \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
898 \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
899 \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion
900 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
901 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of
#1^^J
}%
902 \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
904 % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
910 \def\filenamecatcodes{%
924 \def\pushthisfilestack{%
925 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
927 \def\pushthisfilestackX{%
928 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
930 \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
931 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
934 \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
935 \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
936 the stack of filenames is empty.
}}
941 % outputs that line, centered.
943 \parseargdef\center{%
945 \let\centersub\centerH
947 \let\centersub\centerV
949 \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
950 \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case
954 \advance\hsize by -
\leftskip
955 \advance\hsize by -
\rightskip
960 \newcount\centerpenalty
962 % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if
963 % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe
964 % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still
965 % prevent a page break here.
966 \centerpenalty =
\lastpenalty
967 \ifnum\centerpenalty>
10000 \vskip\parskip \fi
968 \ifnum\centerpenalty>
9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi
969 \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}%
972 % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
974 \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
976 % @comment ...line which is ignored...
977 % @c is the same as @comment
978 % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
980 \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=
\active%
981 \catcode`\@=
\other \catcode`\
{=
\other \catcode`\
}=
\other\commentxxx}%
983 {\catcode`\^^M=
\active%
984 \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M
{\endgroup%
985 \futurelet\nexttoken\commentxxxx}%
986 \gdef\commentxxxx{\ifx\nexttoken\aftermacro\expandafter\comment\fi}%
989 \def\c{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=
\active%
990 \catcode`\@=
\other \catcode`\
{=
\other \catcode`\
}=
\other%
992 {\catcode`\^^M=
\active \gdef\cxxx#1^^M
{\endgroup}}
993 % See comment in \scanmacro about why the definitions of @c and @comment differ
995 % @paragraphindent NCHARS
996 % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
997 % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
998 % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
1000 \def\asisword{asis
} % no translation, these are keywords
1003 \parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
1008 \defaultparindent =
0pt
1010 \defaultparindent =
#1em
1013 \parindent =
\defaultparindent
1016 % @exampleindent NCHARS
1017 % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
1018 % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
1019 % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
1020 \parseargdef\exampleindent{%
1025 \lispnarrowing =
0pt
1027 \lispnarrowing =
#1em
1032 % @firstparagraphindent WORD
1033 % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
1034 % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
1037 % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
1038 % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
1039 % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
1040 % By default, we suppress indentation.
1042 \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
1043 \def\insertword{insert
}
1045 \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
1048 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent =
\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
1049 \else\ifx\temp\insertword
1050 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent =
\relax
1052 \errhelp =
\EMsimple
1053 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `
\temp'
}%
1057 % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
1058 % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
1060 % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
1063 \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
1064 \gdef\indent {\restorefirstparagraphindent \indent}%
1065 \gdef\noindent{\restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent}%
1066 \global\everypar =
{\kern -
\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent}%
1069 \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
1070 \global\let\indent =
\ptexindent
1071 \global\let\noindent =
\ptexnoindent
1072 \global\everypar =
{}%
1076 % @refill is a no-op.
1079 % @setfilename INFO-FILENAME - ignored
1080 \let\setfilename=
\comment
1083 \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=
1\ptexend}
1087 % adobe `portable' document format
1091 \newcount\filenamelength
1101 \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
1103 % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
1104 % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined.
1105 \ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined
1107 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
1116 % PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
1117 % for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
1118 % double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
1119 % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
1121 % See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and
1122 % related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user
1123 % to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
1124 % that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to
1125 % do this reliably, so we use it.
1127 % #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements,
1129 \def\txiescapepdf#1{%
1130 \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined
1131 % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log?
1132 % Many times it won't matter.
1134 % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses,
1135 % backslashes, and other special chars.
1136 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}%
1140 \newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
1141 with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot
1142 be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
1147 % Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex,
1148 % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a
1149 % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead
1150 % of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as
1151 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. We use
1152 % black by default, though.
1153 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
1154 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
1156 % rg sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
1157 % RG sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
1158 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg
#1 RG
}}
1160 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
1161 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
1163 \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
1168 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
1169 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
1170 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
1171 \def\lastcolordefs{}
1175 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
1183 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
1185 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
1186 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
1194 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines
}
1196 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
1197 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
1198 \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 =
\hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
1199 \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 =
\hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
1201 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
1202 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
1203 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
1205 \let\pdfimgext=
\empty
1207 \openin 1 #1.pdf
\ifeof 1
1208 \openin 1 #1.PDF
\ifeof 1
1209 \openin 1 #1.png
\ifeof 1
1210 \openin 1 #1.jpg
\ifeof 1
1211 \openin 1 #1.jpeg
\ifeof 1
1212 \openin 1 #1.JPG
\ifeof 1
1213 \errhelp =
\nopdfimagehelp
1214 \errmessage{Could not find image file
#1 for pdf
}%
1215 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG
}%
1217 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg
}%
1219 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg
}%
1221 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png
}%
1223 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF
}%
1225 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf
}%
1230 % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
1231 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
1232 \ifnum\pdftexversion <
14
1235 \immediate\pdfximage
1237 \ifdim \wd0 >
0pt width
\pdfimagewidth \fi
1238 \ifdim \wd2 >
0pt height
\pdfimageheight \fi
1239 \ifnum\pdftexversion<
13
1244 \ifnum\pdftexversion <
14 \else
1245 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
1249 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
1250 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
1253 \makevalueexpandable
1254 \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
1255 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
1256 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name
{\pdfdestname} xyz
}%
1259 % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
1262 % by default, use black for everything.
1263 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack}
1264 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack}
1265 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
1267 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
1268 % come from Petr Olsak
1269 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
1270 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
1271 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=
\expnumber{#1}\relax
1272 \advance\tempnum by
1
1273 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
1275 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
1276 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
1277 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
1278 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
1279 % #4 is the page number
1281 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
1282 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
1283 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section
1284 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
1285 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
1286 \edef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
1287 \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
1288 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
1290 \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinedest
1293 % Also escape PDF chars in the display string.
1294 \edef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
1295 \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext
1297 \pdfoutline goto name
{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
1300 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
1302 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
1303 \def\partentry#
#1#
#2#
#3#
#4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
1304 \def\numchapentry#
#1#
#2#
#3#
#4{%
1305 \def\thischapnum{#
#2}%
1307 \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1309 \def\numsecentry#
#1#
#2#
#3#
#4{%
1310 \advancenumber{chap
\thischapnum}%
1311 \def\thissecnum{#
#2}%
1312 \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1314 \def\numsubsecentry#
#1#
#2#
#3#
#4{%
1315 \advancenumber{sec
\thissecnum}%
1316 \def\thissubsecnum{#
#2}%
1318 \def\numsubsubsecentry#
#1#
#2#
#3#
#4{%
1319 \advancenumber{subsec
\thissubsecnum}%
1321 \def\thischapnum{0}%
1323 \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1325 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
1326 % al. a second time, below.
1327 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
1328 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1329 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1330 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1331 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
1332 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1333 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1334 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1337 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
1338 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
1339 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
1341 % We use the node names as the destinations.
1342 \def\numchapentry#
#1#
#2#
#3#
#4{%
1343 \dopdfoutline{#
#1}{count-
\expnumber{chap#
#2}}{#
#3}{#
#4}}%
1344 \def\numsecentry#
#1#
#2#
#3#
#4{%
1345 \dopdfoutline{#
#1}{count-
\expnumber{sec#
#2}}{#
#3}{#
#4}}%
1346 \def\numsubsecentry#
#1#
#2#
#3#
#4{%
1347 \dopdfoutline{#
#1}{count-
\expnumber{subsec#
#2}}{#
#3}{#
#4}}%
1348 \def\numsubsubsecentry#
#1#
#2#
#3#
#4{% count is always zero
1349 \dopdfoutline{#
#1}{}{#
#3}{#
#4}}%
1351 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
1352 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
1353 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
1354 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
1355 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
1357 % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
1358 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too
1359 % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents
1360 % we use for the index sort strings.
1364 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
1365 % Texinfo index files. So set that up.
1366 \def\
{{\lbracecharliteral}%
1367 \def\
}{\rbracecharliteral}%
1368 \catcode`\\=
\active \otherbackslash
1369 \input \tocreadfilename
1372 {\catcode`
[=
1 \catcode`
]=
2
1373 \catcode`
{=
\other \catcode`
}=
\other
1374 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
1375 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
1378 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|
}%
1379 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
1380 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
1381 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
1382 \advance\filenamelength by
1
1385 \def\getfilename#1{%
1387 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
1388 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
1390 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|
\relax
1392 \ifnum\pdftexversion <
14
1393 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
1395 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
1397 % make a live url in pdf output.
1400 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
1401 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
1402 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
1403 % people have actually reported a problem with.
1405 \normalturnoffactive
1408 \makevalueexpandable
1409 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
1410 % special-casing \var here?
1413 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
1414 \startlink attr
{/Border
[0 0 0]}%
1415 user
{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (
#1) >>
}%
1417 \def\pdfgettoks#1.
{\setbox\boxA=
\hbox{\toksA=
{#1.
}\toksB=
{}\maketoks}}
1418 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1=
{\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
1419 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=
1\let\next=
\maketoks}
1420 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|
{\let\first=
#1\toksD=
{#1}\toksA=
{#2}}
1422 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|
\relax
1424 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
1425 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
1426 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
1428 \ifnum0=
\countA\else\makelink\fi
1429 \ifx\first.
\let\next=
\done\else
1431 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
1432 \ifx\first,
\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
1434 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
1436 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
1437 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC=
{}\global\countA=
0}
1439 \startlink attr
{/Border
[0 0 0]} goto name
{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
1440 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
1441 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA=
{\the\toksB}}\st}
1444 \let\pdfmkdest =
\gobble
1445 \let\pdfurl =
\gobble
1446 \let\endlink =
\relax
1447 \let\setcolor =
\gobble
1448 \let\pdfsetcolor =
\gobble
1449 \let\pdfmakeoutlines =
\relax
1450 \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
1453 % PDF outline support for XeTeX
1455 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
1457 \pdfmakepagedesttrue \relax
1458 % Emulate the primitive of pdfTeX
1459 \def\pdfdest name
#1 xyz
{%
1460 \special{pdf:dest (name
#1)
[@thispage /XYZ @xpos @ypos
]}%
1463 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
1464 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
1466 \makevalueexpandable
1467 % In the case of XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts strings to UTF-16.
1468 % Therefore \txiescapepdf is not necessary.
1469 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name
{#1} xyz
}%
1472 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
1473 \edef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
1474 \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
1475 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
1479 % In the case of XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts strings to UTF-16.
1480 % Therefore \txiescapepdf is not necessary.
1481 \special{pdf:out
[-
] #2 << /Title (
#1) /A << /S /GoTo /D (name
\pdfoutlinedest) >> >>
}%
1485 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
1488 % In the case of XeTeX, counts of subentries is not necesary.
1489 % Therefore, read toc only once.
1491 % We use the node names as the destinations.
1492 \def\partentry#
#1#
#2#
#3#
#4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
1493 \def\numchapentry#
#1#
#2#
#3#
#4{%
1494 \dopdfoutline{#
#1}{1}{#
#3}{#
#4}}%
1495 \def\numsecentry#
#1#
#2#
#3#
#4{%
1496 \dopdfoutline{#
#1}{2}{#
#3}{#
#4}}%
1497 \def\numsubsecentry#
#1#
#2#
#3#
#4{%
1498 \dopdfoutline{#
#1}{3}{#
#3}{#
#4}}%
1499 \def\numsubsubsecentry#
#1#
#2#
#3#
#4{%
1500 \dopdfoutline{#
#1}{4}{#
#3}{#
#4}}%
1502 \let\appentry\numchapentry%
1503 \let\appsecentry\numsecentry%
1504 \let\appsubsecentry\numsubsecentry%
1505 \let\appsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry%
1506 \let\unnchapentry\numchapentry%
1507 \let\unnsecentry\numsecentry%
1508 \let\unnsubsecentry\numsubsecentry%
1509 \let\unnsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry%
1511 % In the case of XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts strings to UTF-16.
1512 % Therefore, the encoding and the language may not be considered.
1516 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
1517 % Texinfo index files. So set that up.
1518 \def\
{{\lbracecharliteral}%
1519 \def\
}{\rbracecharliteral}%
1520 \catcode`\\=
\active \otherbackslash
1521 \input \tocreadfilename
1524 {\catcode`
[=
1 \catcode`
]=
2
1525 \catcode`
{=
\other \catcode`
}=
\other
1526 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
1527 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
1530 \special{pdf:docview << /PageMode /UseOutlines >>
}
1531 \special{pdf:tounicode UTF8-UTF16
}
1535 % @image support for XeTeX
1537 \newif\ifxeteximgpdf
1538 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
1541 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
1542 \def\doxeteximage#1#2#3{%
1543 \def\xeteximagewidth{#2}\setbox0 =
\hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
1544 \def\xeteximageheight{#3}\setbox2 =
\hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
1546 % XeTeX (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
1547 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
1548 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
1550 \let\xeteximgext=
\empty
1553 \openin 1 #1.pdf
\ifeof 1
1554 \openin 1 #1.PDF
\ifeof 1
1555 \openin 1 #1.png
\ifeof 1
1556 \openin 1 #1.jpg
\ifeof 1
1557 \openin 1 #1.jpeg
\ifeof 1
1558 \openin 1 #1.JPG
\ifeof 1
1559 \errmessage{Could not find image file
#1 for XeTeX
}%
1560 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{JPG
}%
1562 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpeg
}%
1564 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpg
}%
1566 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{png
}%
1568 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{PDF
} \global\xeteximgpdftrue%
1570 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{pdf
} \global\xeteximgpdftrue%
1576 \XeTeXpdffile "
#1".
\xeteximgext ""
1578 \XeTeXpicfile "
#1".
\xeteximgext ""
1580 \ifdim \wd0 >
0pt width
\xeteximagewidth \fi
1581 \ifdim \wd2 >
0pt height
\xeteximageheight \fi \relax
1587 % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
1588 % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
1589 % italics, not bold italics.
1591 \def\setfontstyle#1{%
1592 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
1593 \csname ten
#1\endcsname % change the current font
1596 % Select #1 fonts with the current style.
1598 \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts
\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
1600 \def\rm{\fam=
0 \setfontstyle{rm
}}
1601 \def\it{\fam=
\itfam \setfontstyle{it
}}
1602 \def\sl{\fam=
\slfam \setfontstyle{sl
}}
1603 \def\bf{\fam=
\bffam \setfontstyle{bf
}}\def\bfstylename{bf
}
1604 \def\tt{\fam=
\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt
}}
1606 % Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since
1607 % in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh.
1608 \def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf
}}
1610 % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
1611 % So we set up a \sf.
1613 \def\sf{\fam=
\sffam \setfontstyle{sf
}}
1614 \let\li =
\sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
1616 % We don't need math for this font style.
1617 \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl
}}
1620 % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
1621 % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
1622 % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
1624 \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
1625 \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
1626 \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
1628 % can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
1629 \def\baselinefactor{1}
1631 \newdimen\textleading
1634 \normalbaselineskip =
\baselinefactor\dimen0
1635 \normallineskip =
\lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
1637 \setbox\strutbox =
\hbox{%
1638 \vrule width0pt height
\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
1639 depth
\strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
1643 % PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
1645 % do nothing with this by default.
1646 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1
\endcsname\gobble
1647 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT
\endcsname\gobble
1648 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT
\endcsname\gobble
1650 % if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
1651 % (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
1652 % older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
1653 \ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else
1655 \catcode`\^^M=
\active \def^^M
{^^J
}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
1656 \catcode`\%=
12 \immediate\pdfobj stream
{%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
1657 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1658 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1659 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
1660 %%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
1663 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
1671 /CMapName /TeX-OT1-
0 def
1673 1 begincodespacerange
1729 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
1735 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1
\endcsname#1{%
1736 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode
\the\pdflastobj\space 0 R
}%
1741 \catcode`\^^M=
\active \def^^M
{^^J
}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
1742 \catcode`\%=
12 \immediate\pdfobj stream
{%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
1743 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1744 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1745 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
1746 %%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
1749 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
1757 /CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-
0 def
1759 1 begincodespacerange
1817 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
1823 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT
\endcsname#1{%
1824 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode
\the\pdflastobj\space 0 R
}%
1829 \catcode`\^^M=
\active \def^^M
{^^J
}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
1830 \catcode`\%=
12 \immediate\pdfobj stream
{%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
1831 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1832 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
1833 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
1834 %%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
1837 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
1845 /CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-
0 def
1847 1 begincodespacerange
1892 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
1898 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT
\endcsname#1{%
1899 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode
\the\pdflastobj\space 0 R
}%
1904 % Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2.
1905 % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
1906 % encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit).
1914 \def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
1915 \font#1=
\fontprefix#2#3 scaled
#4
1916 \csname cmap
#5\endcsname#1%
1918 % This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
1923 % Use cm as the default font prefix.
1924 % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
1925 % before you read in texinfo.tex.
1926 \ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined
1929 % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
1931 \def\rmbshape{bx
} % where the normal face is bold
1936 \def\ttslshape{sltt
}
1946 % Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.)
1948 \def\definetextfontsizexi{%
1949 % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
1950 \def\textnominalsize{11pt
}
1951 \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
1952 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1
}
1953 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT
}
1954 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1
}
1955 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT
}
1956 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1
}
1957 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1
}
1958 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1
}
1959 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT
}
1960 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled
\mainmagstep
1961 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled
\mainmagstep
1962 \def\textecsize{1095}
1964 % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
1965 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1
}
1966 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT
}
1967 \setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT
}
1968 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT
}
1969 \def\df{\let\tentt=
\deftt \let\tenbf =
\defbf
1970 \let\tenttsl=
\defttsl \let\tensl=
\defsl \bf}
1972 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
1973 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt
}
1974 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1
}
1975 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT
}
1976 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1
}
1977 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT
}
1978 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1
}
1979 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1
}
1980 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1
}
1981 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT
}
1984 \def\smallecsize{0900}
1986 % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
1987 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt
}
1988 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1
}
1989 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT
}
1990 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1
}
1991 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT
}
1992 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1
}
1993 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1
}
1994 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1
}
1995 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT
}
1996 \font\smalleri=cmmi8
1997 \font\smallersy=cmsy8
1998 \def\smallerecsize{0800}
2000 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
2001 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt
}
2002 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1
}
2003 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT
}
2004 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1
}
2005 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT
}
2006 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT
}
2007 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1
}
2008 \let\titlebf=
\titlerm
2009 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1
}
2010 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled
\magstep3
2011 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled
\magstep4
2012 \def\titleecsize{2074}
2014 % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
2015 \def\chapnominalsize{17pt
}
2016 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1
}
2017 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT
}
2018 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1
}
2019 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT
}
2020 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT
}
2021 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1
}
2023 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1
}
2024 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled
\magstep2
2025 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled
\magstep3
2026 \def\chapecsize{1728}
2028 % Section fonts (14.4pt).
2029 \def\secnominalsize{14pt
}
2030 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1
}
2031 \setfont\secrmnotbold\rmshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1
}
2032 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT
}
2033 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1
}
2034 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT
}
2035 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT
}
2036 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1
}
2038 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1
}
2039 \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled
\magstep1
2040 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled
\magstep2
2041 \def\sececsize{1440}
2043 % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
2044 \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt
}
2045 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1
}
2046 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT
}
2047 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1
}
2048 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT
}
2049 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT
}
2050 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1
}
2052 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1
}
2053 \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled
\magstephalf
2054 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled
1315
2055 \def\ssececsize{1200}
2057 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
2058 \def\reducednominalsize{10pt
}
2059 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1
}
2060 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT
}
2061 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1
}
2062 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT
}
2063 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1
}
2064 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1
}
2065 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1
}
2066 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT
}
2067 \font\reducedi=cmmi10
2068 \font\reducedsy=cmsy10
2069 \def\reducedecsize{1000}
2071 \textleading =
13.2pt
% line spacing for 11pt CM
2072 \textfonts % reset the current fonts
2074 } % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi
2077 % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
2078 % section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU
2079 % Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the
2080 % future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
2082 \def\definetextfontsizex{%
2083 % Text fonts (10pt).
2084 \def\textnominalsize{10pt
}
2085 \edef\mainmagstep{1000}
2086 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1
}
2087 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT
}
2088 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1
}
2089 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT
}
2090 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1
}
2091 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1
}
2092 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1
}
2093 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT
}
2094 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled
\mainmagstep
2095 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled
\mainmagstep
2096 \def\textecsize{1000}
2098 % A few fonts for @defun names and args.
2099 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1
}
2100 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT
}
2101 \setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT
}
2102 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT
}
2103 \def\df{\let\tentt=
\deftt \let\tenbf =
\defbf
2104 \let\tensl=
\defsl \let\tenttsl=
\defttsl \bf}
2106 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
2107 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt
}
2108 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1
}
2109 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT
}
2110 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1
}
2111 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT
}
2112 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1
}
2113 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1
}
2114 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1
}
2115 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT
}
2118 \def\smallecsize{0900}
2120 % Fonts for small examples (8pt).
2121 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt
}
2122 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1
}
2123 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT
}
2124 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1
}
2125 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT
}
2126 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1
}
2127 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1
}
2128 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1
}
2129 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT
}
2130 \font\smalleri=cmmi8
2131 \font\smallersy=cmsy8
2132 \def\smallerecsize{0800}
2134 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
2135 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt
}
2136 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1
}
2137 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT
}
2138 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1
}
2139 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT
}
2140 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT
}
2141 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1
}
2142 \let\titlebf=
\titlerm
2143 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1
}
2144 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled
\magstep3
2145 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled
\magstep4
2146 \def\titleecsize{2074}
2148 % Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
2149 \def\chapnominalsize{14pt
}
2150 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1
}
2151 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT
}
2152 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1
}
2153 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT
}
2154 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT
}
2155 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1
}
2157 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1
}
2158 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled
\magstep1
2159 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled
\magstep2
2160 \def\chapecsize{1440}
2162 % Section fonts (12pt).
2163 \def\secnominalsize{12pt
}
2164 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1
}
2165 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT
}
2166 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1
}
2167 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT
}
2168 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT
}
2169 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1
}
2171 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1
}
2173 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled
\magstep1
2174 \def\sececsize{1200}
2176 % Subsection fonts (10pt).
2177 \def\ssecnominalsize{10pt
}
2178 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1
}
2179 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT
}
2180 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1
}
2181 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT
}
2182 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT
}
2183 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1
}
2185 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1
}
2188 \def\ssececsize{1000}
2190 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
2191 \def\reducednominalsize{9pt
}
2192 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1
}
2193 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT
}
2194 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1
}
2195 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT
}
2196 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1
}
2197 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1
}
2198 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1
}
2199 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT
}
2200 \font\reducedi=cmmi9
2201 \font\reducedsy=cmsy9
2202 \def\reducedecsize{0900}
2204 \divide\parskip by
2 % reduce space between paragraphs
2205 \textleading =
12pt
% line spacing for 10pt CM
2206 \textfonts % reset the current fonts
2208 } % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex
2211 % We provide the user-level command
2213 % (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed.
2219 \parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
2220 \def\textsizearg{#1}%
2221 %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
2223 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
2224 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
2226 \begingroup \globaldefs=
1
2227 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
2228 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
2231 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `
10' or `
11', not `
\textsizearg'
}
2236 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
2237 % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. We don't
2238 % bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont; awaiting user need.
2240 \def\resetmathfonts{%
2241 \textfont0=
\tenrm \textfont1=
\teni \textfont2=
\tensy
2242 \textfont\itfam=
\tenit \textfont\slfam=
\tensl \textfont\bffam=
\tenbf
2243 \textfont\ttfam=
\tentt \textfont\sffam=
\tensf
2246 % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
2247 % of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
2248 % current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
2249 % \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
2251 % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
2252 % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used
2253 % in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
2255 % This all needs generalizing, badly.
2258 \let\tenrm=
\textrm \let\tenit=
\textit \let\tensl=
\textsl
2259 \let\tenbf=
\textbf \let\tentt=
\texttt \let\smallcaps=
\textsc
2260 \let\tensf=
\textsf \let\teni=
\texti \let\tensy=
\textsy
2261 \let\tenttsl=
\textttsl
2262 \def\curfontsize{text
}%
2263 \def\lsize{reduced
}\def\lllsize{smaller
}%
2264 \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
2266 \let\tenrm=
\titlerm \let\tenit=
\titleit \let\tensl=
\titlesl
2267 \let\tenbf=
\titlebf \let\tentt=
\titlett \let\smallcaps=
\titlesc
2268 \let\tensf=
\titlesf \let\teni=
\titlei \let\tensy=
\titlesy
2269 \let\tenttsl=
\titlettsl
2270 \def\curfontsize{title
}%
2271 \def\lsize{chap
}\def\lllsize{subsec
}%
2272 \resetmathfonts \setleading{27pt
}}
2273 \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}}
2275 \let\tenrm=
\chaprm \let\tenit=
\chapit \let\tensl=
\chapsl
2276 \let\tenbf=
\chapbf \let\tentt=
\chaptt \let\smallcaps=
\chapsc
2277 \let\tensf=
\chapsf \let\teni=
\chapi \let\tensy=
\chapsy
2278 \let\tenttsl=
\chapttsl
2279 \def\curfontsize{chap
}%
2280 \def\lsize{sec
}\def\lllsize{text
}%
2281 \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt
}}
2283 \let\tenrm=
\secrm \let\tenit=
\secit \let\tensl=
\secsl
2284 \let\tenbf=
\secbf \let\tentt=
\sectt \let\smallcaps=
\secsc
2285 \let\tensf=
\secsf \let\teni=
\seci \let\tensy=
\secsy
2286 \let\tenttsl=
\secttsl
2287 \def\curfontsize{sec
}%
2288 \def\lsize{subsec
}\def\lllsize{reduced
}%
2289 \resetmathfonts \setleading{17pt
}}
2291 \let\tenrm=
\ssecrm \let\tenit=
\ssecit \let\tensl=
\ssecsl
2292 \let\tenbf=
\ssecbf \let\tentt=
\ssectt \let\smallcaps=
\ssecsc
2293 \let\tensf=
\ssecsf \let\teni=
\sseci \let\tensy=
\ssecsy
2294 \let\tenttsl=
\ssecttsl
2295 \def\curfontsize{ssec
}%
2296 \def\lsize{text
}\def\lllsize{small
}%
2297 \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt
}}
2298 \let\subsubsecfonts =
\subsecfonts
2300 \let\tenrm=
\reducedrm \let\tenit=
\reducedit \let\tensl=
\reducedsl
2301 \let\tenbf=
\reducedbf \let\tentt=
\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=
\reducedsc
2302 \let\tensf=
\reducedsf \let\teni=
\reducedi \let\tensy=
\reducedsy
2303 \let\tenttsl=
\reducedttsl
2304 \def\curfontsize{reduced
}%
2305 \def\lsize{small
}\def\lllsize{smaller
}%
2306 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt
}}
2308 \let\tenrm=
\smallrm \let\tenit=
\smallit \let\tensl=
\smallsl
2309 \let\tenbf=
\smallbf \let\tentt=
\smalltt \let\smallcaps=
\smallsc
2310 \let\tensf=
\smallsf \let\teni=
\smalli \let\tensy=
\smallsy
2311 \let\tenttsl=
\smallttsl
2312 \def\curfontsize{small
}%
2313 \def\lsize{smaller
}\def\lllsize{smaller
}%
2314 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt
}}
2316 \let\tenrm=
\smallerrm \let\tenit=
\smallerit \let\tensl=
\smallersl
2317 \let\tenbf=
\smallerbf \let\tentt=
\smallertt \let\smallcaps=
\smallersc
2318 \let\tensf=
\smallersf \let\teni=
\smalleri \let\tensy=
\smallersy
2319 \let\tenttsl=
\smallerttsl
2320 \def\curfontsize{smaller
}%
2321 \def\lsize{smaller
}\def\lllsize{smaller
}%
2322 \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt
}}
2324 % Fonts for short table of contents.
2325 \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1
}
2326 \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1
} % no cmb12
2327 \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1
}
2328 \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT
}
2330 % Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
2331 \def\angleleft{$
\langle$
}
2332 \def\angleright{$
\rangle$
}
2334 % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
2335 \let\smallexamplefonts =
\smallfonts
2337 % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
2338 % can fit this many characters:
2339 % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
2340 % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
2341 % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
2342 % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
2343 % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
2345 % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
2346 % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
2349 % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
2351 \definetextfontsizexi
2356 % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
2357 % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
2358 % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
2359 % this property, we can check that font parameter.
2361 \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=
0pt
}
2363 % Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
2364 % define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
2365 % \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
2366 % style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles
2367 % currently in effect.
2371 %\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp.
2372 %\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp.
2375 %\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code.
2376 %\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code.
2377 \newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now).
2378 \newif\ifmarkupexample
2380 \newif\ifmarkupverbatim
2382 \let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
2384 \def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
2385 \csname markup
#1true
\endcsname
2386 \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
2390 \let\markupstylesetup\empty
2392 \def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
2393 \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
2394 \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
2398 % Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
2399 \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
2400 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
2401 \csname markupsetuplq
\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
2402 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
2405 \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
2406 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
2407 \csname markupsetuprq
\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
2408 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
2415 \gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`
\lq}
2416 \gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'
\rq}
2418 \gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`
\codequoteleft}
2419 \gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'
\codequoteright}
2422 \let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
2423 \let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
2425 \let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
2426 \let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
2428 \let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetcodequoteleft
2429 \let\markupsetuprqkbd \markupsetcodequoteright
2431 \let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft
2432 \let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright
2434 \let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
2435 \let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
2437 \let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
2438 \let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
2440 % Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe
2441 % (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d).
2442 % The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it
2443 % works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the
2444 % lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27.
2446 \def\codequoteright{%
2447 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected
\endcsname\relax
2448 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected
\endcsname\relax
2454 % and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
2455 % Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
2456 % the code environments to do likewise.
2458 \def\codequoteleft{%
2459 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick
\endcsname\relax
2460 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick
\endcsname\relax
2461 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
2462 % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
2468 % Commands to set the quote options.
2470 \parseargdef\codequoteundirected{%
2473 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected
\endcsname
2475 \else\ifx\temp\offword
2476 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected
\endcsname
2479 \errhelp =
\EMsimple
2480 \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `
\temp', must be on|off
}%
2484 \parseargdef\codequotebacktick{%
2487 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick
\endcsname
2489 \else\ifx\temp\offword
2490 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick
\endcsname
2493 \errhelp =
\EMsimple
2494 \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `
\temp', must be on|off
}%
2498 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
2499 \def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
2501 % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
2502 \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=
0
2506 % #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant.
2507 % If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl,
2508 % and 2) do not add an italic correction.
2509 \def\dosmartslant#1#2{%
2511 {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=
\relax}%
2512 {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}%
2515 \def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl}
2516 \def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it}
2518 % Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following
2519 % character) is such as not to need one.
2520 \def\smartitaliccorrection{%
2525 \else\ifx\next\comma%
2531 % Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns.
2532 \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}}
2534 % @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
2535 % ttsl for book titles, do we?
2536 \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}
2540 \let\saveaftersmartic =
\aftersmartic
2541 \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=
\saveaftersmartic}%
2546 \let\slanted=
\smartslanted
2547 \let\dfn=
\smartslanted
2548 \let\emph=
\smartitalic
2550 % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
2551 \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
2552 \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
2553 \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
2555 % @b, explicit bold. Also @strong.
2559 % @sansserif, explicit sans.
2560 \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
2562 % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
2563 % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
2564 % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
2566 \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -
1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
2567 \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `-
}
2569 % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
2570 % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
2571 % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
2574 \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
2575 \sfcode`\.=\@m
\sfcode`\?=\@m
\sfcode`\!=\@m
2576 \sfcode`\:=\@m
\sfcode`\;=\@m
\sfcode`\,=\@m
2577 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
2579 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
2580 \sfcode`\
.3000\sfcode`\?
3000\sfcode`\!
3000
2581 \sfcode`\:
2000\sfcode`\;
1500\sfcode`\,
1250
2582 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
2585 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
2587 % @t, explicit typewriter.
2589 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
2594 \def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp
}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
2596 % @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes.
2597 \let\indicateurl=
\samp
2599 % @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same
2600 % size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc.
2601 % This is a subroutine for that.
2604 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
2605 \spaceskip =
\fontdimen2\font
2607 % Switch to typewriter.
2610 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
2611 \def\
{{\spaceskip =
0pt
{} }}%
2613 % Turn off hyphenation.
2620 \null % reset spacefactor to 1000
2623 % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
2624 % (But see \codedashfinish below.)
2625 % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
2626 % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
2628 % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
2629 % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
2630 % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
2631 % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms.
2633 \catcode`\-=
\active \catcode`
\_=
\active
2634 \catcode`\'=
\active \catcode`\`=
\active
2635 \global\let'=
\rq \global\let`=
\lq % default definitions
2637 \global\def\code{\begingroup
2638 \setupmarkupstyle{code
}%
2639 % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
2640 \catcode\dashChar=
\active \catcode\underChar=
\active
2648 % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break
2650 \global\let\codedashprev=
\codedash
2655 \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish}
2656 \gdef\codedashfinish{%
2657 \normaldash % always output the dash character itself.
2659 % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless
2660 % (a) the next character is a -, or
2661 % (b) the preceding character is a -.
2662 % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -.
2663 % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b.
2664 \ifx\next\codedash \else
2665 \ifx\codedashprev\codedash
2666 \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi
2668 % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a
2669 % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}.
2670 \global\let\codedashprev=
\next
2675 \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
2678 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
2679 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
2680 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
2681 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
2683 \mathchar"
075F
% class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
2684 \else\normalunderscore \fi
2685 \discretionary{}{}{}}%
2689 % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
2690 % each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad.
2691 % @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at -
2694 \newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
2696 \def\keywordtrue{true
}
2697 \def\keywordfalse{false
}
2699 \parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
2701 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
2702 \allowcodebreakstrue
2703 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
2704 \allowcodebreaksfalse
2706 \errhelp =
\EMsimple
2707 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `
\txiarg', must be true|false
}%
2711 % For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary,
2712 % so use \code rather than \samp.
2718 % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional
2719 % (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and
2720 % an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in
2721 % addition to) the url itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url.
2723 % TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second
2724 % arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target).
2725 \newif\ifurefurlonlylink
2727 % The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected
2728 % places within the url. (There used to be another version, which
2729 % didn't support automatic breaking.)
2730 \def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak}
2731 \let\uref=
\urefbreak
2733 \def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,
\finish}
2734 \def\urefbreakfinish#1,
#2,
#3,
#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example
2737 \setbox0 =
\hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
2739 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
2741 \setbox0 =
\hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg
2745 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg
2748 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency,
2749 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc.
2750 \unhbox0\ (
\urefcode{#1})
%
2753 \unhbox0\ (
\urefcode{#1})
% DVI, always show arg and url
2756 \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it
2762 % Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only).
2764 \catcode`\&=
\active \catcode`\.=
\active
2765 \catcode`\#=
\active \catcode`\?=
\active
2771 \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup
2772 \setupmarkupstyle{code
}%
2782 % By default, they are just regular characters.
2783 \global\def&
{\normalamp}
2784 \global\def.
{\normaldot}
2785 \global\def#
{\normalhash}
2786 \global\def?
{\normalquest}
2787 \global\def/
{\normalslash}
2790 % we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help
2791 % line breaking of long url's. The unequal skips make look better in
2792 % cmtt at least, especially for dots.
2793 \def\urefprestretchamount{.13em
}
2794 \def\urefpoststretchamount{.1em
}
2795 \def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus
\urefprestretchamount\relax}
2796 \def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus
\urefprestretchamount\relax}
2798 \def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&
\urefpoststretch}
2799 \def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .
\urefpoststretch}
2800 \def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#
\urefpoststretch}
2801 \def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?
\urefpoststretch}
2802 \def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish}
2805 \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{%
2806 \urefprestretch \slashChar
2807 % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of
2808 % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://.
2809 \ifx\next/
\else \urefpoststretch \fi
2813 % One more complication: by default we'll break after the special
2814 % characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so
2815 % allow that. Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control.
2817 \parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{%
2819 \ifx\txiarg\wordnone
2820 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
2821 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore
2822 \def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
2823 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter
2824 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak}
2826 \errhelp =
\EMsimple
2827 \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `
\txiarg'
}%
2830 \def\wordafter{after
}
2831 \def\wordbefore{before
}
2834 \urefbreakstyle after
2836 % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
2840 % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
2841 % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
2843 %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
2845 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,
\finish}
2846 \def\doemail#1,
#2,
#3\finish{\begingroup
2849 \setbox0 =
\hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
2850 \ifdim\wd0>
0pt
\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
2857 % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
2858 % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
2859 % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
2860 \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
2862 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
2863 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
2864 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
2865 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
2866 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
2867 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
2869 \errhelp =
\EMsimple
2870 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `
\txiarg'
}%
2873 \def\worddistinct{distinct
}
2874 \def\wordexample{example
}
2877 % Default is `distinct'.
2878 \kbdinputstyle distinct
2880 % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
2881 % then @kbd has no effect.
2882 \def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??
\par}}
2885 \def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{%
2886 \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??
}%
2887 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
2888 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd
}\look}}\fi
2889 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd
}\look}}\fi
2892 % definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size.
2893 %\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
2895 %\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
2896 % \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
2897 % \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
2898 % \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
2899 % \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
2900 % \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
2902 % definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already
2903 % monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But
2904 % if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
2906 \def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key
}%
2908 \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
2911 % @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
2912 \def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
2914 % @clickstyle @arrow (by default)
2915 \parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
2918 % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
2919 % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
2921 \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
2923 % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
2924 % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
2927 \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,
\finish}
2928 \def\doacronym#1,
#2,
#3\finish{%
2929 {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
2931 \ifx\temp\empty \else
2932 \space (
{\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})
%
2934 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
2937 % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
2938 % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
2940 \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,
\finish}
2941 \def\doabbr#1,
#2,
#3\finish{%
2942 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
2944 \ifx\temp\empty \else
2945 \space (
{\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})
%
2947 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
2950 % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
2954 % @math outputs its argument in math mode.
2956 % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
2957 % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
2958 % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
2959 % which is what @var uses.
2961 \catcode`
\_ =
\active
2962 \gdef\mathunderscore{%
2964 \def_{\ifnum\fam=
\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
2967 % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \.
2968 % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no
2969 % particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care.
2971 % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
2972 \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=
\ttfam \mathchar"
075C
\else\backslash \fi}
2975 \ifmmode\else % only go into math if not in math mode already
2978 \let\\ =
\mathbackslash
2980 % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
2990 % have to provide another name for sup operator
2992 $
\expandafter\finishmath\fi
2994 \def\finishmath#1{#1$
\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
2996 % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
2997 % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
2998 % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
3001 \catcode`^ =
\active
3002 \catcode`< =
\active
3003 \catcode`> =
\active
3004 \catcode`+ =
\active
3005 \catcode`' =
\active
3011 \let' =
\ptexquoteright
3015 % for @sub and @sup, if in math mode, just do a normal sub/superscript.
3016 % If in text, use math to place as sub/superscript, but switch
3017 % into text mode, with smaller fonts. This is a different font than the
3018 % one used for real math sub/superscripts (8pt vs. 7pt), but let's not
3019 % fix it (significant additions to font machinery) until someone notices.
3021 \def\sub{\ifmmode \expandafter\sb \else \expandafter\finishsub\fi}
3022 \def\finishsub#1{$
\sb{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize #1}}$
}%
3024 \def\sup{\ifmmode \expandafter\ptexsp \else \expandafter\finishsup\fi}
3025 \def\finishsup#1{$
\ptexsp{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize #1}}$
}%
3027 % @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}.
3028 % Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex,
3029 % except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about.
3031 \def\outfmtnametex{tex
}
3033 \long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,
\finish}
3034 \long\def\doinlinefmt#1,
#2,
\finish{%
3035 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
3036 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
3039 % @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if
3040 % FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT.
3041 \long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,
\finish}
3042 \long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,
#2,
#3,
#4,
\finish{%
3043 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
3044 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi
3047 % For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid
3048 % setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for
3049 % example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being
3050 % ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal
3051 % *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as
3052 % well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the
3053 % delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill.
3055 \long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw}
3056 \long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,
\finish}
3057 \def\doinlinerawtwo#1,
#2,
\finish{%
3058 \def\inlinerawname{#1}%
3059 \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
3060 \endgroup % close group opened by \tex.
3063 % @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set.
3065 \long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,
\finish}
3066 \long\def\doinlineifset#1,
#2,
\finish{%
3067 \def\inlinevarname{#1}%
3068 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET
\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax
3069 \else\ignorespaces#2\fi
3072 % @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set.
3074 \long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,
\finish}
3075 \long\def\doinlineifclear#1,
#2,
\finish{%
3076 \def\inlinevarname{#1}%
3077 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET
\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi
3084 % @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}.
3088 % @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters.
3089 % Unless we're in typewriter, use \ecfont because the CM text fonts do
3090 % not have braces, and we don't want to switch into math.
3091 \def\mylbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char123}}
3092 \def\myrbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char125}}
3093 \let\
{=
\mylbrace \let\lbracechar=\
{
3094 \let\
}=
\myrbrace \let\rbracechar=\
}
3096 % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
3097 % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
3098 \catcode`\
{ =
\other \catcode`\
} =
\other
3099 \catcode`\
[ =
1 \catcode`\
] =
2
3100 \catcode`\! =
0 \catcode`\\ =
\other
3101 !gdef!lbracecmd
[\
{]%
3102 !gdef!rbracecmd
[\
}]%
3103 !gdef!lbraceatcmd
[@
{]%
3104 !gdef!rbraceatcmd
[@
}]%
3107 % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
3110 % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
3111 % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
3113 \let\dotaccent =
\ptexdot
3114 \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
3115 \let\tieaccent =
\ptext
3116 \let\ubaraccent =
\ptexb
3117 \let\udotaccent =
\d
3119 % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
3120 % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
3121 \def\questiondown{?`
}
3123 \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a
}}}
3124 \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o
}}}
3126 % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
3131 \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
3132 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
3133 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j
}%
3137 % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
3138 % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
3140 \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=
1000 }
3142 % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
3143 % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
3144 % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
3145 % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
3146 % \scriptscriptstyle).
3151 \vbox to
\ht0{\hbox{%
3152 \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt
3153 % for 10pt running text, \lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX.
3154 % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt.
3155 \count255=
\the\fam $
\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$
%
3157 % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize.
3158 \selectfonts\lllsize A
%
3167 % Some math mode symbols. Define \ensuremath to switch into math mode
3168 % unless we are already there. Expansion tricks may not be needed here,
3169 % but safer, and can't hurt.
3170 \def\ensuremath{\ifmmode \expandafter\asis \else\expandafter\ensuredmath \fi}
3171 \def\ensuredmath#1{$
\relax#1$
}
3173 \def\bullet{\ensuremath\ptexbullet}
3174 \def\geq{\ensuremath\ge}
3175 \def\leq{\ensuremath\le}
3176 \def\minus{\ensuremath-
}
3178 % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
3179 % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
3180 % typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
3181 % in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do
3182 % whichever is larger.
3186 \setbox0=
\hbox{...
}% get width of three periods
3193 \hskip 0pt plus
.25fil
3194 .
\hskip 0pt plus1fil
3195 .
\hskip 0pt plus1fil
3196 .
\hskip 0pt plus
.5fil
3200 % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
3204 \spacefactor=
\endofsentencespacefactor
3207 % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
3209 % Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
3210 % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
3213 \def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex
\hbox to
1em
{\hfil$
\rightarrow$
\hfil}}
3214 \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex
\hbox to
1em
{\hfil$
\Rightarrow$
\hfil}}
3215 \def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to
1em
{\hfil$
\mapsto$
\hfil}}
3216 \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex
\hbox to
1em
{\hfil$
\dashv$
\hfil}}
3217 \def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to
1em
{\hfil$
\ptexequiv$
\hfil}}
3219 % The @error{} command.
3220 % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
3224 {\tentt \global\dimen0 =
3em
}% Width of the box.
3225 \dimen2 =
.55pt
% Thickness of rules
3226 % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
3227 \setbox0 =
\hbox{\kern-
.75pt
\reducedsf \putworderror\kern-
1.5pt
}
3229 \setbox\errorbox=
\hbox to
\dimen0{\hfil
3230 \hsize =
\dimen0 \advance\hsize by -
5.8pt
% Space to left+right.
3231 \advance\hsize by -
2\dimen2 % Rules.
3233 \hrule height
\dimen2
3234 \hbox{\vrule width
\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
3235 \vtop{\kern2.4pt
\box0 \kern2.4pt
}% Space above/below.
3236 \kern3pt\vrule width
\dimen2}% Space to right.
3237 \hrule height
\dimen2}
3240 \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex
\copy\errorbox}
3242 % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
3244 \def\pounds{{\it\$
}}
3246 % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
3247 % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
3248 % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
3249 % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
3250 % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
3252 % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
3253 % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
3259 % feybo - bold slanted
3261 % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
3262 % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
3265 % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
3269 \def\euro{{\eurofont e
}}
3271 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
3272 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
3273 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
3276 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
3277 % that to the current nominal size.
3279 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
3280 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
3282 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize
\endcsname}%
3284 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
3286 \font\thiseurofont =
\ifusingit{feybo10
}{feybr10
} at
\eurosize
3289 \font\thiseurofont =
\ifusingit{feymo10
}{feymr10
} at
\eurosize
3294 % Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because
3295 % sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
3298 % Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
3299 \def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0
}} % Eth
3300 \def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0
}} % eth
3301 \def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE
}} % Thorn
3302 \def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE
}} % thorn
3304 \def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"
13}}
3305 \def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
3306 \def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"
14}}
3307 \def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
3308 \def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"
0E
}}
3309 \def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"
0F
}}
3310 \def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"
12}}
3311 \def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"
0D
}}
3313 % This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
3314 % we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the
3315 % tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
3316 % dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
3318 % ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
3319 % the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
3323 \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
3324 \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
3325 \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
3326 \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
3328 \ecfont \setbox0=
\hbox{#1}%
3329 \ifdim\ht0=
1ex
\accent"
0C
#1%
3330 \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"
0C
\hidewidth}%
3335 \def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"
81}}\def\macrocharA{A
}
3336 \def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1
}}\def\macrochara{a
}
3337 \def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"
86}}\def\macrocharE{E
}
3338 \def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6
}}\def\macrochare{e
}
3340 % Use the European Computer Modern fonts (cm-super in outline format)
3341 % for non-CM glyphs. That is ec* for regular text and tc* for the text
3342 % companion symbols (LaTeX TS1 encoding). Both are part of the ec
3343 % package and follow the same conventions.
3345 \def\ecfont{\etcfont{e
}}
3346 \def\tcfont{\etcfont{t
}}
3349 % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
3350 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
3351 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
3352 % hopefully nobody will notice/care.
3353 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize
\endcsname}%
3354 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize
\endcsname}%
3357 \font\thisecfont =
#1ctt
\ecsize \space at
\nominalsize
3359 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
3361 \font\thisecfont =
#1cb
\ifusingit{i
}{x
}\ecsize \space at
\nominalsize
3364 \font\thisecfont =
#1c
\ifusingit{ti
}{rm
}\ecsize \space at
\nominalsize
3370 % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
3371 % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
3372 % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
3374 \def\registeredsymbol{%
3375 $^
{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex
\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R
}%
3380 % @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
3382 \def\textdegree{$^
\circ$
}
3384 % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
3385 % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
3386 % so we'll define it if necessary.
3388 \ifx\Orb\thisisundefined
3389 \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
3393 \chardef\quotedblleft="
5C
3394 \chardef\quotedblright=`\"
3395 \chardef\quoteleft=`\`
3396 \chardef\quoteright=`\'
3399 \message{page headings,
}
3401 \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue =
1.5in
3402 \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue =
2pc
3404 % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
3406 \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
3408 % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
3409 % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
3411 \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
3412 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage =
\setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
3413 \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
3414 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage =
\setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
3416 \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{%
3417 \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in
\chaprm \centerline{#1}%
3418 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
3421 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
3423 \parindent=
0pt
\textfonts
3424 % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
3425 \vglue\titlepagetopglue
3426 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
3427 \finishedtitlepagetrue
3429 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
3430 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
3431 \let\oldpage =
\page
3433 \iffinishedtitlepage\else
3436 \let\page =
\oldpage
3443 \iffinishedtitlepage\else
3446 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
3447 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
3448 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
3449 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
3453 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
3454 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
3457 % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
3458 \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
3461 \global\let\shortcontents =
\relax
3462 \global\let\contents =
\relax
3465 \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
3467 \global\let\contents =
\relax
3468 \global\let\shortcontents =
\relax
3472 \def\finishtitlepage{%
3473 \vskip4pt \hrule height
2pt width
\hsize
3474 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
3475 \finishedtitlepagetrue
3478 % Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation,
3479 % don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used
3480 % inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. Because
3481 % it is always used for titles, nothing else, we call \rmisbold. \par
3482 % should be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group.
3484 \def\raggedtitlesettings{%
3486 \hyphenpenalty=
10000
3492 % Macros to be used within @titlepage:
3494 \let\subtitlerm=
\tenrm
3495 \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip =
13pt
\normalbaselines}
3497 \parseargdef\title{%
3499 \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
3500 % print a rule at the page bottom also.
3501 \finishedtitlepagefalse
3502 \vskip4pt \hrule height
4pt width
\hsize \vskip4pt
3505 \parseargdef\subtitle{%
3507 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
3510 % @author should come last, but may come many times.
3511 % It can also be used inside @quotation.
3513 \parseargdef\author{%
3514 \def\temp{\quotation}%
3516 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
3519 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus
1filll
\seenauthortrue \fi
3520 {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}%
3525 % Set up page headings and footings.
3527 \let\thispage=
\folio
3529 \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
3530 \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
3531 \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
3532 \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
3534 % Now make \makeheadline and \makefootline in Plain TeX use those variables
3535 \headline=
{{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
3536 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
3537 \footline=
{{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
3538 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
3539 \let\HEADINGShook=
\relax
3541 % Commands to set those variables.
3542 % For example, this is what @headings on does
3543 % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
3544 % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
3545 % @evenfooting @thisfile||
3546 % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
3549 \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
3550 \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|
\finish}
3551 \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|
#2\|
#3\|
#4\finish{%
3552 \global\evenheadline=
{\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
3554 \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
3555 \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|
\finish}
3556 \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|
#2\|
#3\|
#4\finish{%
3557 \global\oddheadline=
{\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
3559 \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
3561 \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
3562 \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|
\finish}
3563 \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|
#2\|
#3\|
#4\finish{%
3564 \global\evenfootline=
{\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
3566 \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
3567 \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|
\finish}
3568 \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|
#2\|
#3\|
#4\finish{%
3569 \global\oddfootline =
{\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
3571 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
3572 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
3573 \global\advance\pageheight by -
12pt
3574 \global\advance\vsize by -
12pt
3577 \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
3579 % @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
3580 % @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
3582 % The same set of arguments for:
3587 % @everyheadingmarks
3588 % @everyfootingmarks
3590 % These define \getoddheadingmarks, \getevenheadingmarks,
3591 % \getoddfootingmarks, and \getevenfootingmarks, each to one of
3592 % \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks.
3594 \def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even
}{heading
}}
3595 \def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd
}{heading
}}
3596 \def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even
}{footing
}}
3597 \def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd
}{footing
}}
3598 \def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even
}{heading
}{#1}
3599 \headingmarks{odd
}{heading
}{#1} }
3600 \def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even
}{footing
}{#1}
3601 \headingmarks{odd
}{footing
}{#1} }
3602 % #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
3603 \def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
3604 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get
#3headingmarks
\endcsname
3605 \global\expandafter\let\csname get
#1#2marks
\endcsname \temp
3608 \everyheadingmarks bottom
3609 \everyfootingmarks bottom
3611 % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
3612 % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
3613 % @headings off turns them off.
3614 % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
3615 % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
3616 % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
3617 % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
3618 % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
3619 % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
3621 \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS
#1\endcsname}
3623 \def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination
3624 \evenheadline=
{\hfil}\evenfootline=
{\hfil}%
3625 \oddheadline=
{\hfil}\oddfootline=
{\hfil}%
3628 \def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=
1 \headingsoff}} % global setting
3629 \HEADINGSoff % it's the default
3631 % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
3632 % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
3633 % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
3634 % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
3635 % edge of all pages.
3636 \def\HEADINGSdouble{%
3638 \global\evenfootline=
{\hfil}
3639 \global\oddfootline=
{\hfil}
3640 \global\evenheadline=
{\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
3641 \global\oddheadline=
{\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}}
3642 \global\let\contentsalignmacro =
\chapoddpage
3644 \let\contentsalignmacro =
\chappager
3646 % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
3647 % page number on top right.
3648 \def\HEADINGSsingle{%
3650 \global\evenfootline=
{\hfil}
3651 \global\oddfootline=
{\hfil}
3652 \global\evenheadline=
{\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}}
3653 \global\oddheadline=
{\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}}
3654 \global\let\contentsalignmacro =
\chappager
3656 \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
3658 \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=
\HEADINGSdoublex}
3659 \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=
\HEADINGSafter
3660 \def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
3661 \global\evenfootline=
{\hfil}
3662 \global\oddfootline=
{\hfil}
3663 \global\evenheadline=
{\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
3664 \global\oddheadline=
{\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}}
3665 \global\let\contentsalignmacro =
\chapoddpage
3668 \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=
\HEADINGSsinglex}
3669 \def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
3670 \global\evenfootline=
{\hfil}
3671 \global\oddfootline=
{\hfil}
3672 \global\evenheadline=
{\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}}
3673 \global\oddheadline=
{\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}}
3674 \global\let\contentsalignmacro =
\chappager
3677 % Subroutines used in generating headings
3678 % This produces Day Month Year style of output.
3679 % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
3680 % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
3681 \ifx\today\thisisundefined
3685 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
3686 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
3687 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
3692 % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
3693 % It generates no output of its own.
3694 \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
3695 \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
3699 % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
3701 % default indentation of table text
3702 \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=
.8in
3703 % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
3704 \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=
.3in
3705 % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
3706 \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=
.1in
3708 % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
3711 % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
3713 % They also define \itemindex
3714 % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
3716 \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
3718 \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-
\parskip\nobreak\fi}
3720 \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
3721 \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
3723 \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
3724 \advance\hsize by -
\rightskip
3725 \advance\hsize by -
\tableindent
3726 \setbox0=
\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
3728 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
3730 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
3731 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
3732 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
3733 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
3734 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
3735 \ifdim \wd0>
\itemmax
3737 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
3738 % but leave it ragged-right.
3740 \advance\leftskip by-
\tableindent
3741 \advance\hsize by
\tableindent
3742 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
\relax
3743 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
3746 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
3747 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
3748 \nobreak \vskip-
\parskip
3750 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
3751 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
3752 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
3753 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
3754 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
3755 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
3759 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
3761 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
3762 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
3764 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
3765 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
3766 % eventually be printed.
3767 \nobreak\kern-
\tableindent
3768 \dimen0 =
\itemmax \advance\dimen0 by
\itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -
\wd0
3770 \nobreak\kern\dimen0
3772 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
3776 \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment
}}
3777 \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment
}}
3779 % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
3781 \let\itemindex\gobble
3785 \def\itemindex #
#1{\doind {fn
}{\code{#
#1}}}%
3786 \tablecheck{ftable
}%
3789 \def\itemindex #
#1{\doind {vr
}{\code{#
#1}}}%
3790 \tablecheck{vtable
}%
3793 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=
\active
3795 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
3796 that we are
\inenvironment\thisenv}%
3797 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
3804 \def\itemindicate{#1}%
3809 \makevalueexpandable
3810 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
3814 \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
3816 \ifnum 0#1>
0 \advance \leftskip by
#1\mil \fi
3817 \ifnum 0#2>
0 \tableindent=
#2\mil \fi
3818 \ifnum 0#3>
0 \advance \rightskip by
#3\mil \fi
3819 \itemmax=
\tableindent
3820 \advance \itemmax by -
\itemmargin
3821 \advance \leftskip by
\tableindent
3822 \exdentamount=
\tableindent
3824 \parskip =
\smallskipamount
3825 \ifdim \parskip=
0pt
\parskip=
2pt
\fi
3826 \let\item =
\internalBitem
3827 \let\itemx =
\internalBitemx
3829 \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
3832 \let\Eitemize\Etable
3833 \let\Eenumerate\Etable
3835 % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
3839 \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
3843 \itemmax=
\itemindent
3844 \advance\itemmax by -
\itemmargin
3845 \advance\leftskip by
\itemindent
3846 \exdentamount=
\itemindent
3848 \parskip=
\smallskipamount
3849 \ifdim\parskip=
0pt
\parskip=
2pt
\fi
3851 % Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says
3852 % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
3853 % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the
3854 % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if
3855 % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
3856 \def\itemcontents{#1}%
3857 \setbox0 =
\hbox{\itemcontents}%
3859 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
3860 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
3862 \let\item=
\itemizeitem
3865 % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
3868 \advance\itemno by
1 % for enumerations
3869 {\let\par=
\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
3871 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
3872 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
3873 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
3874 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
3875 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
3876 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
3877 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
3878 % that's the theory.
3879 \ifnum\lastpenalty<
10000 \parskip=
0in
\fi
3881 \hbox to
0pt
{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
3884 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}% not good to break after first line of item.
3886 % We can be in inner vertical mode in a footnote, although an
3887 % @itemize looks awful there.
3892 % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
3893 % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
3895 \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
3897 % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
3898 % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
3899 % argument is the same as `1'.
3901 \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
3902 \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
3903 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
3905 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
3907 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
3908 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
3909 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
3910 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
3911 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
3912 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
3914 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
3915 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
3916 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
3917 % not equal to itself.
3918 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
3920 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
3921 % continuing to look for a <number>.
3923 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`
\thearg=
0\relax
3924 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
3927 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`
\thearg=
\expandafter`
\thearg\relax
3928 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
3930 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
3934 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
3939 % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
3942 \def\numericenumerate{%
3944 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
3947 % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
3948 \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
3949 \itemno =
\expandafter`
\thearg
3951 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
3953 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
3960 % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
3961 \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
3962 \itemno =
\expandafter`
\thearg
3964 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
3966 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
3973 % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
3974 % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
3975 % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
3977 \def\startenumeration#1{%
3978 \advance\itemno by -
1
3979 \doitemize{#1.
}\flushcr
3982 % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
3985 \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a
}}
3986 \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A
}}
3987 \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
3988 \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
3991 % @multitable macros
3992 % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
3994 % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
3995 % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
3996 % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
3997 % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
3999 % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
4003 % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
4004 % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
4007 % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
4008 % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
4009 % columns as desired.
4012 % Or use a template:
4013 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
4015 % using the widest term desired in each column.
4017 % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
4018 % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
4019 % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
4020 % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
4022 % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
4025 % Sample multitable:
4027 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
4028 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
4035 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
4036 % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
4038 % They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
4039 % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
4042 % Default dimensions may be reset by user.
4043 % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
4044 % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
4045 % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
4046 % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
4048 % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
4050 \newskip\multitableparskip
4051 \newskip\multitableparindent
4052 \newdimen\multitablecolspace
4053 \newskip\multitablelinespace
4054 \multitableparskip=
0pt
4055 \multitableparindent=
6pt
4056 \multitablecolspace=
12pt
4057 \multitablelinespace=
0pt
4059 % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
4061 \let\endsetuptable\relax
4062 \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
4063 \let\columnfractions\relax
4064 \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
4067 % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
4068 % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
4070 \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
4071 \global\advance\colcount by
1
4072 \expandafter\xdef\csname col
\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
4079 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
4082 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
4083 \global\setpercenttrue
4086 \let\go\pickupwholefraction
4088 \global\advance\colcount by
1
4089 \setbox0=
\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
4090 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
4091 \expandafter\xdef\csname col
\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
4094 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
4095 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
4096 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
4097 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
4099 \let\go =
\setuptable
4105 % multitable-only commands.
4107 % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. Assignments
4108 % have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an
4109 % alignment entry. \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to
4110 % undo it ourselves.
4111 \def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
4113 \checkenv\multitable
4115 \gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings
4116 \global\everytab=
{\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
4117 \the\everytab % for the first item
4120 % default for tables with no headings.
4121 \let\headitemcrhook=
\relax
4123 % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
4124 % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
4125 % we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve.
4126 % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
4127 \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &
\the\everytab}%
4129 % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
4131 \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
4133 \envdef\multitable{%
4137 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
4138 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
4139 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
4140 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
4145 \setmultitablespacing
4146 \parskip=
\multitableparskip
4147 \parindent=
\multitableparindent
4153 \global\everytab=
{}% Reset from possible headitem.
4154 \global\colcount=
0 % Reset the column counter.
4156 % Check for saved footnotes, etc.:
4159 % Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset:
4161 \global\let\headitemcrhook=
\relax
4165 \parsearg\domultitable
4167 \def\domultitable#1{%
4168 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
4169 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
4171 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
4172 % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
4173 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
4174 % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
4176 \global\advance\colcount by
1
4179 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
4180 \hsize=
\expandafter\csname col
\the\colcount\endcsname
4182 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
4183 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
4186 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
4187 % to the width of each template entry.
4189 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
4190 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
4191 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
4192 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
4194 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
4197 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
4198 \advance\hsize by
\leftskip
4201 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
4202 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
4203 \advance\hsize by
\multitablecolspace
4205 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
4206 \leftskip=
\multitablecolspace
4208 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
4209 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
4210 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
4212 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
4214 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
4215 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
4216 % marking characters.
4217 \noindent\ignorespaces##
\unskip\multistrut
4222 \egroup % end the \halign
4223 \global\setpercentfalse
4226 \def\setmultitablespacing{%
4227 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
4229 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
4230 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
4231 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
4232 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
4233 \ifdim\multitablelinespace=
0pt
4234 \setbox0=
\vbox{X
}\global\multitablelinespace=
\the\baselineskip
4235 \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-
\ht0
4237 % Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
4238 % table. If not, do nothing.
4239 % If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
4240 \ifdim\multitableparskip>
\multitablelinespace
4241 \global\multitableparskip=
\multitablelinespace
4242 \global\advance\multitableparskip-
7pt
% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
4243 % than skip between lines in the table.
4245 \ifdim\multitableparskip=
0pt
4246 \global\multitableparskip=
\multitablelinespace
4247 \global\advance\multitableparskip-
7pt
% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
4248 % than skip between lines in the table.
4252 \message{conditionals,
}
4254 % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
4255 % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
4256 % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
4257 % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
4258 % attempt to close an environment group.
4261 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname =
\relax
4262 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.
#1\endcsname =
1
4265 \makecond{ifnotdocbook
}
4266 \makecond{ifnothtml
}
4267 \makecond{ifnotinfo
}
4268 \makecond{ifnotplaintext
}
4271 % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
4273 \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry
}}
4274 \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription
}}
4275 \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook
}}
4276 \def\html{\doignore{html
}}
4277 \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook
}}
4278 \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml
}}
4279 \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo
}}
4280 \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex
}}
4281 \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext
}}
4282 \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml
}}
4283 \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore
}}
4284 \def\menu{\doignore{menu
}}
4285 \def\xml{\doignore{xml
}}
4287 % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
4289 % A count to remember the depth of nesting.
4290 \newcount\doignorecount
4292 \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
4293 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
4295 \catcode`\@ =
\other
4296 \catcode`\
{ =
\other
4297 \catcode`\
} =
\other
4299 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
4302 % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
4305 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
4309 { \catcode`_=
11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
4312 \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
4313 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
4315 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
4316 \long\def\doignoretext#
#1^^M@end
#1{%
4317 \doignoretextyyy#
#1^^M@
#1\_STOP_}%
4319 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
4320 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
4321 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
4322 \long\def\doignoretextyyy#
#1^^M@
#1#
#2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{#
#2}\_STOP_}%
4324 % And now expand that command.
4329 \def\doignoreyyy#1{%
4331 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
4332 \let\next\doignoretextzzz
4333 \else % Found a nested condition, ...
4334 \advance\doignorecount by
1
4335 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
4336 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
4338 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
4341 % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
4343 \def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
4344 \ifnum\doignorecount =
0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
4345 \let\next\enddoignore
4346 \else % Still inside a nested condition.
4347 \advance\doignorecount by -
1
4348 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
4353 % Finish off ignored text.
4355 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
4356 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
4357 % would result in a blank line in the output.
4358 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M
{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
4362 % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
4363 % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
4365 % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
4366 % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
4367 % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
4369 % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
4371 \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
4372 \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
4374 \makevalueexpandable
4376 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET
#1}}%
4384 % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
4385 \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
4387 % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
4389 \parseargdef\clear{%
4391 \makevalueexpandable
4392 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET
#1\endcsname=
\relax
4396 % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
4397 \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
4398 \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
4400 \catcode`\-=
\active \catcode`
\_=
\active
4402 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
4403 \let\value =
\expandablevalue
4404 % We don't want these characters active, ...
4405 \catcode`\-=
\other \catcode`
\_=
\other
4406 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
4407 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
4408 % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
4409 \let-
\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore
4413 % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
4414 % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
4415 % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
4416 % the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the
4417 % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
4418 % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
4419 % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
4421 % Unfortunately, this has the consequence that when _ is in the *value*
4422 % of an @set, it does not print properly in the roman fonts (get the cmr
4423 % dot accent at position 126 instead). No fix comes to mind, and it's
4424 % been this way since 2003 or earlier, so just ignore it.
4426 \def\expandablevalue#1{%
4427 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET
#1\endcsname\relax
4428 {[No value for ``
#1''
]}%
4429 \message{Variable `
#1', used in @value, is not set.
}%
4431 \csname SET
#1\endcsname
4435 % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
4438 % To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call
4439 % \makecond and then redefine.
4442 \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=
\ifsetfail}}}
4445 \makevalueexpandable
4447 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET
#2\endcsname\relax
4448 #1% If not set, redefine \next.
4453 \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset
}}
4455 % @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been
4456 % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
4458 % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
4459 % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
4460 % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
4463 \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=
\ifclearfail}}}
4464 \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear
}}
4466 % @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written
4467 % without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the
4468 % TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered
4469 % defined even though it is not a Texinfo command.
4471 \makecond{ifcommanddefined
}
4472 \def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=
\ifcmddefinedfail}}}
4474 \def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{%
4475 \makevalueexpandable
4477 \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax
4478 #1% If not defined, \let\next as above.
4483 \def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined
}}
4485 % @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above.
4486 \makecond{ifcommandnotdefined
}
4487 \def\ifcommandnotdefined{%
4488 \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=
\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}}
4489 \def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined
}}
4491 % Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to
4492 % test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available.
4493 \set txicommandconditionals
4495 % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
4496 % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
4497 \let\dircategory=
\comment
4499 % @defininfoenclose.
4500 \let\definfoenclose=
\comment
4504 % Index generation facilities
4506 % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
4507 % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
4508 \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite
}}
4510 % \newindex {foo} defines an index named IX.
4511 % It automatically defines \IXindex such that
4512 % \IXindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index IX.
4513 % It also defines \IXindfile to be the number of the output channel for
4514 % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is IX.
4515 % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
4516 % for the sake of vms.
4519 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile
\endcsname=
0
4520 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index
\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
4521 \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
4524 % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
4526 \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
4528 % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
4530 \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
4532 \def\newcodeindex#1{%
4533 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile
\endcsname=
0
4534 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index
\endcsname{%
4535 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
4538 % The default indices:
4539 \newindex{cp
}% concepts,
4540 \newcodeindex{fn
}% functions,
4541 \newcodeindex{vr
}% variables,
4542 \newcodeindex{tp
}% types,
4543 \newcodeindex{ky
}% keys
4544 \newcodeindex{pg
}% and programs.
4547 % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
4548 % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
4550 % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
4553 \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
4554 \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
4556 % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
4557 % #3 the target index (bar).
4558 \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
4559 % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
4560 % closing the target index.
4561 \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex
#2\endcsname \relax
4562 % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
4563 % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
4564 \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile
\endcsname
4565 \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex
#2\endcsname =
1
4567 % redefine \fooindfile:
4568 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=
\csname#3indfile
\endcsname
4569 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile
\endcsname=
\temp
4570 % redefine \fooindex:
4571 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index
\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
4574 % Define \doindex, the driver for all index macros.
4575 % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
4576 % and it the two-letter name of the index.
4578 \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\doindexxxx}
4579 \def\doindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
4581 % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
4582 \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\docodeindexxxx}
4583 \def\docodeindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
4585 % Used when writing an index entry out to an index file, to prevent
4586 % expansion of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
4589 \escapechar = `\\
% use backslash in output files.
4590 \def\@
{@
}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
4591 \def\
{\realbackslash\space }%
4593 % Need these unexpandable (because we define \tt as a dummy)
4594 % definitions when @{ or @} appear in index entry text. Also, more
4595 % complicated, when \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
4596 % We can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
4597 % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. Perhaps we
4598 % should use @lbracechar and @rbracechar?
4599 \def\
{{{\tt\char123}}%
4600 \def\
}{{\tt\char125}}%
4602 % Do the redefinitions.
4606 % For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to
4607 % redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
4608 % \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @,
4609 % this will be simpler.
4614 \let\
{ =
\lbraceatcmd
4615 \let\
} =
\rbraceatcmd
4617 % Do the redefinitions.
4622 % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
4624 \def\commondummies{%
4625 % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
4626 % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words,
4627 % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
4628 % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
4629 % from whatever follows.
4631 % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
4634 % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
4635 % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
4636 % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
4638 \def\definedummyword #
#1{\def#
#1{\string#
#1\space}}%
4639 \def\definedummyletter#
#1{\def#
#1{\string#
#1}}%
4640 \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
4642 \commondummiesnofonts
4644 \definedummyletter\_%
4645 \definedummyletter\-
%
4647 % Non-English letters.
4658 \definedummyword\exclamdown
4662 \definedummyword\ordf
4663 \definedummyword\ordm
4664 \definedummyword\questiondown
4668 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
4670 \definedummyword\gtr
4671 \definedummyword\hat
4672 \definedummyword\less
4675 \definedummyword\tclose
4678 \definedummyword\LaTeX
4679 \definedummyword\TeX
4681 % Assorted special characters.
4682 \definedummyword\arrow
4683 \definedummyword\bullet
4684 \definedummyword\comma
4685 \definedummyword\copyright
4686 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
4687 \definedummyword\dots
4688 \definedummyword\enddots
4689 \definedummyword\entrybreak
4690 \definedummyword\equiv
4691 \definedummyword\error
4692 \definedummyword\euro
4693 \definedummyword\expansion
4694 \definedummyword\geq
4695 \definedummyword\guillemetleft
4696 \definedummyword\guillemetright
4697 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft
4698 \definedummyword\guilsinglright
4699 \definedummyword\lbracechar
4700 \definedummyword\leq
4701 \definedummyword\mathopsup
4702 \definedummyword\minus
4703 \definedummyword\ogonek
4704 \definedummyword\pounds
4705 \definedummyword\point
4706 \definedummyword\print
4707 \definedummyword\quotedblbase
4708 \definedummyword\quotedblleft
4709 \definedummyword\quotedblright
4710 \definedummyword\quoteleft
4711 \definedummyword\quoteright
4712 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase
4713 \definedummyword\rbracechar
4714 \definedummyword\result
4715 \definedummyword\sub
4716 \definedummyword\sup
4717 \definedummyword\textdegree
4719 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
4722 \normalturnoffactive
4724 % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
4725 % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
4726 \makevalueexpandable
4729 % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
4730 % Define \definedumyletter, \definedummyaccent and \definedummyword before
4733 \def\commondummiesnofonts{%
4734 % Control letters and accents.
4735 \definedummyletter\!
%
4736 \definedummyaccent\"
%
4737 \definedummyaccent\'
%
4738 \definedummyletter\*
%
4739 \definedummyaccent\,
%
4740 \definedummyletter\.
%
4741 \definedummyletter\/
%
4742 \definedummyletter\:
%
4743 \definedummyaccent\=
%
4744 \definedummyletter\?
%
4745 \definedummyaccent\^
%
4746 \definedummyaccent\`
%
4747 \definedummyaccent\~
%
4751 \definedummyword\dotaccent
4752 \definedummyword\ogonek
4753 \definedummyword\ringaccent
4754 \definedummyword\tieaccent
4755 \definedummyword\ubaraccent
4756 \definedummyword\udotaccent
4757 \definedummyword\dotless
4759 % Texinfo font commands.
4763 \definedummyword\sansserif
4765 \definedummyword\slanted
4768 % Commands that take arguments.
4769 \definedummyword\abbr
4770 \definedummyword\acronym
4771 \definedummyword\anchor
4772 \definedummyword\cite
4773 \definedummyword\code
4774 \definedummyword\command
4775 \definedummyword\dfn
4776 \definedummyword\dmn
4777 \definedummyword\email
4778 \definedummyword\emph
4779 \definedummyword\env
4780 \definedummyword\file
4781 \definedummyword\image
4782 \definedummyword\indicateurl
4783 \definedummyword\inforef
4784 \definedummyword\kbd
4785 \definedummyword\key
4786 \definedummyword\math
4787 \definedummyword\option
4788 \definedummyword\pxref
4789 \definedummyword\ref
4790 \definedummyword\samp
4791 \definedummyword\strong
4792 \definedummyword\tie
4794 \definedummyword\uref
4795 \definedummyword\url
4796 \definedummyword\var
4797 \definedummyword\verb
4799 \definedummyword\xref
4802 % For testing: output @{ and @} in index sort strings as \{ and \}.
4803 \newif\ifusebracesinindexes
4805 \let\indexlbrace\relax
4806 \let\indexrbrace\relax
4810 @gdef@backslashdisappear
{@def\
{}}
4817 \gdef\indexnonalnumdisappear{%
4818 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore
\endcsname\relax\else
4819 % @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us ignore left quotes in the sort term.
4820 % (Introduced for FSFS 2nd ed.)
4824 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexbackslashignore
\endcsname\relax\else
4828 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexhyphenignore
\endcsname\relax\else
4831 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlessthanignore
\endcsname\relax\else
4834 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexatsignignore
\endcsname\relax\else
4839 \gdef\indexnonalnumreappear{%
4848 % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
4849 % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
4850 % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
4851 % would be for a given command (usually its argument).
4854 % Accent commands should become @asis.
4855 \def\definedummyaccent#
#1{\let#
#1\asis}%
4856 % We can just ignore other control letters.
4857 \def\definedummyletter#
#1{\let#
#1\empty}%
4858 % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below.
4859 \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
4860 \commondummiesnofonts
4862 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
4863 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
4864 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
4869 \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
4870 \def\-
{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting
4872 \uccode`
\1=`\
{ \uppercase{\def\
{{1}}%
4873 \uccode`
\1=`\
} \uppercase{\def\
}{1}}%
4877 % Non-English letters.
4894 \def\questiondown{?
}%
4901 % Assorted special characters.
4902 % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
4904 \def\bullet{bullet
}%
4906 \def\copyright{copyright
}%
4912 \def\expansion{==>
}%
4914 \def\guillemetleft{<<
}%
4915 \def\guillemetright{>>
}%
4916 \def\guilsinglleft{<
}%
4917 \def\guilsinglright{>
}%
4921 \def\pounds{pounds
}%
4923 \def\quotedblbase{"
}%
4924 \def\quotedblleft{"
}%
4925 \def\quotedblright{"
}%
4928 \def\quotesinglbase{,
}%
4929 \def\registeredsymbol{R
}%
4933 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
4934 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
4935 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
4936 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
4937 % that starts with \.
4939 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
4940 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
4941 % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
4947 \let\SETmarginindex=
\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
4949 % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
4950 % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
4951 \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
4953 % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
4954 % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
4955 % TODO: Two-level index? Operation index?
4957 % Workhorse for all indexes.
4958 % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
4959 % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
4960 % is with most defuns, which call us directly).
4962 \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
4965 \requireopenindexfile{#1}%
4966 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
4968 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
4970 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
4971 \toks0 =
\expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
4974 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile
\endcsname}%
4976 \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
4981 % Check if an index file has been opened, and if not, open it.
4982 \def\requireopenindexfile#1{%
4983 \ifnum\csname #1indfile
\endcsname=
0
4984 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile
\endcsname
4986 % A .fls suffix would conflict with the file extension for the output
4987 % of -recorder, so use .f1s instead.
4988 \ifx\suffix\indexisfl\def\suffix{f1
}\fi
4990 \immediate\openout\csname#1indfile
\endcsname \jobname.
\suffix
4991 % Using \immediate here prevents an object entering into the current box,
4992 % which could confound checks such as those in \safewhatsit for preceding
4997 % Output \ as {\indexbackslash}, because \ is an escape character in
4999 \let\indexbackslash=
\relax
5000 {\catcode`\@=
0 \catcode`\\=
\active
5001 @gdef@useindexbackslash
{@def\
{{@indexbackslash
}}}
5004 % Definition for writing index entry text.
5005 \def\sortas#1{\ignorespaces}%
5007 % Definition for writing index entry sort key. Should occur at the at
5008 % the beginning of the index entry, like
5009 % @cindex @sortas{september} \september
5010 % The \ignorespaces takes care of following space, but there's no way
5011 % to remove space before it.
5014 \gdef\indexwritesortas{%
5016 \indexnonalnumreappear
5017 \indexwritesortasxxx}
5018 \gdef\indexwritesortasxxx#1{%
5019 \xdef\indexsortkey{#1}\endgroup}
5023 % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file.
5025 \def\dosubindwrite{%
5026 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
5027 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
5028 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt
\the\toks0}}%
5031 % Remember, we are within a group.
5032 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
5033 \useindexbackslash % \indexbackslash isn't defined now so it will be output
5034 % as is; and it will print as backslash.
5035 % The braces around \indexbrace are recognized by texindex.
5037 % Get the string to sort by, by processing the index entry with all
5038 % font commands turned off.
5040 \def\lbracechar{{\indexlbrace}}%
5041 \def\rbracechar{{\indexrbrace}}%
5044 \indexnonalnumdisappear
5045 \xdef\indexsortkey{}%
5046 \let\sortas=
\indexwritesortas
5047 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}%
5048 \setbox\dummybox =
\hbox{\temp}% Make sure to execute any \sortas
5049 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty
5050 \xdef\indexsortkey{\temp}%
5051 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty\xdef\indexsortkey{ }\fi
5055 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
5056 % the original text, including any font commands. We write
5057 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
5058 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
5062 \string\entry{\indexsortkey}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
5066 \newbox\dummybox % used above
5068 % Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
5070 % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
5071 % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
5072 % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
5073 % \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that
5074 % sequences like this:
5078 % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
5079 % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
5080 % the previous defun.
5082 % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
5083 % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
5085 % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
5087 % But wait, there is a catch there:
5088 % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
5089 % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
5090 % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
5091 % representation of the skip.
5093 % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
5094 % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
5096 \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip
\endcsname}
5098 \newskip\whatsitskip
5099 \newcount\whatsitpenalty
5103 \def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode
5106 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
5107 \whatsitskip =
\lastskip
5108 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
5109 \whatsitpenalty =
\lastpenalty
5111 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
5112 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
5113 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
5114 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
5115 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
5116 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
5123 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
5124 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
5125 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
5126 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
5127 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
5128 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
5129 % @deffn deffn-whatever
5130 % @vindex index-whatever
5132 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
5133 % and the "Description." paragraph.
5134 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>
9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
5136 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
5137 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
5138 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
5139 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
5143 % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
5144 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
5146 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
5147 % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
5148 % containing these kinds of lines:
5150 % before the first topic whose initial is c
5151 % \entry {topic}{pagelist}
5152 % for a topic that is used without subtopics
5154 % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
5155 % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
5156 % for each subtopic.
5158 % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
5159 % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
5161 \def\findex {\fnindex}
5162 \def\kindex {\kyindex}
5163 \def\cindex {\cpindex}
5164 \def\vindex {\vrindex}
5165 \def\tindex {\tpindex}
5166 \def\pindex {\pgindex}
5168 \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
5170 \gdef\cindexsub "
#1"
#2^^M
{\endgroup %
5171 \dosubind{cp
}{#2}{#1}}}
5173 % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
5175 % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
5176 % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
5178 \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
5179 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
5184 \everypar =
{}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
5186 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
5187 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
5189 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
5190 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
5192 % See comment in \requireopenindexfile.
5193 \def\indexname{#1}\ifx\indexname\indexisfl\def\indexname{f1
}\fi
5194 \openin 1 \jobname.
\indexname s
5196 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
5197 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
5198 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
5199 % there is some text.
5200 \putwordIndexNonexistent
5205 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
5206 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
5207 % it can discover if there is anything in it.
5208 \read 1 to
\thisline
5210 \putwordIndexIsEmpty
5212 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
5213 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
5214 % to make right now.
5215 \def\indexbackslash{\ttbackslash}%
5216 \let\indexlbrace\
{ % Likewise, set these sequences for braces
5217 \let\indexrbrace\
} % used in the sort key.
5219 \let\entryorphanpenalty=
\indexorphanpenalty
5221 % Read input from the index file line by line.
5224 \let\firsttoken\relax
5226 \read 1 to
\nextline
5227 \edef\act{\gdef\noexpand\firsttoken{\getfirsttoken\nextline}}%
5233 \let\thisline\nextline
5242 \def\getfirsttoken#1{\expandafter\getfirsttokenx#1\endfirsttoken}
5243 \long\def\getfirsttokenx#1#2\endfirsttoken{\noexpand#1}
5245 \def\loopdo#1\repeat{\def\body{#1}\loopdoxxx}
5246 \def\loopdoxxx{\let\next=
\relax\body\let\next=
\loopdoxxx\fi\next}
5248 % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
5249 % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
5251 {\catcode`\/=
13 \catcode`\-=
13 \catcode`\^=
13 \catcode`\~=
13 \catcode`
\_=
13
5252 \catcode`\|=
13 \catcode`\<=
13 \catcode`\>=
13 \catcode`\+=
13 \catcode`\"=
13
5254 \gdef\initialglyphs{%
5255 % Some changes for non-alphabetic characters. Using the glyphs from the
5256 % math fonts looks more consistent than the typewriter font used elsewhere
5257 % for these characters.
5258 \def\indexbackslash{\math{\backslash}}%
5259 \let\\=
\indexbackslash
5261 % Can't get bold backslash so don't use bold forward slash
5263 \def/
{{\secrmnotbold \normalslash}}%
5264 \def-
{{\normaldash\normaldash}}% en dash `--'
5265 \def^
{{\chapbf \normalcaret}}%
5266 \def~
{{\chapbf \normaltilde}}%
5268 \leavevmode \kern.07em
\vbox{\hrule width
.3em height
.1ex
}\kern .07em
}%
5272 \def+
{$
\normalplus$
}%
5282 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
5285 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
5286 % The glue before the bonus allows a little bit of space at the
5287 % bottom of a column to reduce an increase in inter-line spacing.
5289 \vskip 0pt plus
5\baselineskip
5291 \vskip 0pt plus -
5\baselineskip
5293 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
5294 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
5295 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
5296 % we need before each entry, but it's better.
5298 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
5299 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus
1\baselineskip
5300 \leftline{\secfonts \kern-
0.05em
\secbf #1}%
5301 % \secfonts is inside the argument of \leftline so that the change of
5302 % \baselineskip will not affect any glue inserted before the vbox that
5303 % \leftline creates.
5304 % Do our best not to break after the initial.
5306 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus
.1\baselineskip
5307 \egroup % \initialglyphs
5310 \newdimen\entryrightmargin
5311 \entryrightmargin=
0pt
5313 % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
5314 % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
5315 % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
5320 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
5321 % affect previous text.
5324 % No extra space above this paragraph.
5327 % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks
5328 % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section
5329 % titles, for instance.
5330 \def\*
{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
5331 \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% An undocumented command
5333 % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
5335 \vskip 0pt plus0.5pt
5337 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
5338 \afterassignment\doentry
5341 \def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
5343 % Save the text of the entry
5344 \global\setbox\boxA=
\hbox\bgroup
5345 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
5347 \aftergroup\finishentry
5348 % And now comes the text of the entry.
5349 % Not absorbing as a macro argument reduces the chance of problems
5350 % with catcodes occurring.
5353 \gdef\finishentry#1{%
5355 \dimen@ =
\wd\boxA % Length of text of entry
5356 \global\setbox\boxA=
\hbox\bgroup\unhbox\boxA
5357 % #1 is the page number.
5359 % Get the width of the page numbers, and only use
5360 % leaders if they are present.
5361 \global\setbox\boxB =
\hbox{#1}%
5362 \ifdim\wd\boxB =
0pt
5363 \null\nobreak\hfill\
%
5366 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
5370 \bgroup\let\domark\relax
5371 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA
5373 % The redefinion of \domark stops marks being added in \pdflink to
5374 % preserve coloured links across page boundaries. Otherwise the marks
5375 % would get in the way of \lastbox in \insertindexentrybox.
5377 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable #1%
5381 \ifdim\wd\boxB =
0pt
5382 \global\setbox\entryindexbox=
\vbox{\unhbox\boxA}%
5384 \global\setbox\entryindexbox=
\vbox\bgroup
5385 \prevdepth=
\entrylinedepth
5387 % We want the text of the entries to be aligned to the left, and the
5388 % page numbers to be aligned to the right.
5390 \advance\leftskip by
0pt plus
1fil
5391 \advance\leftskip by
0pt plus -
1fill
5392 \rightskip =
0pt plus -
1fil
5393 \advance\rightskip by
0pt plus
1fill
5394 % Cause last line, which could consist of page numbers on their own
5395 % if the list of page numbers is long, to be aligned to the right.
5396 \parfillskip=
0pt plus -
1fill
5400 \advance\rightskip by
\entryrightmargin
5401 % Determine how far we can stretch into the margin.
5402 % This allows, e.g., "Appendix H GNU Free Documentation License" to
5403 % fit on one line in @letterpaper format.
5404 \ifdim\entryrightmargin>
2.1em
5409 \advance \parfillskip by
0pt minus
1\dimen@i
5412 \advance\dimen@ii by -
1\leftskip
5413 \advance\dimen@ii by -
1\entryrightmargin
5414 \advance\dimen@ii by
1\dimen@i
5415 \ifdim\wd\boxA >
\dimen@ii
% If the entry doesn't fit in one line
5416 \ifdim\dimen@ >
0.8\dimen@ii
% due to long index text
5417 \dimen@ =
0.7\dimen@
% Try to split the text roughly evenly
5419 \advance \dimen@ii by -
1em
5420 \ifnum\dimen@>
\dimen@ii
5421 % If the entry is too long, use the whole line
5424 \advance\leftskip by
0pt plus
1fill
% ragged right
5425 \advance \dimen@ by
1\rightskip
5426 \parshape =
2 0pt
\dimen@
1em
\dimen@ii
5427 % Ideally we'd add a finite glue at the end of the first line only, but
5428 % TeX doesn't seem to provide a way to do such a thing.
5432 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
5433 \finalhyphendemerits =
0
5435 % Word spacing - no stretch
5436 \spaceskip=
\fontdimen2\font minus
\fontdimen4\font
5438 \linepenalty=
1000 % Discourage line breaks.
5439 \hyphenpenalty=
5000 % Discourage hyphenation.
5441 \par % format the paragraph
5445 % delay text of entry until after penalty
5446 \bgroup\aftergroup\insertindexentrybox
5450 \newskip\thinshrinkable
5451 \skip\thinshrinkable=
.15em minus
.15em
5453 \newbox\entryindexbox
5454 \def\insertindexentrybox{%
5456 % The following gets the depth of the last box. This is for even
5457 % line spacing when entries span several lines.
5458 \setbox\dummybox\vbox{%
5459 \unvbox\entryindexbox
5462 \global\entrylinedepth=
\prevdepth
5464 % Note that we couldn't simply \unvbox\entryindexbox followed by
5465 % \nointerlineskip\lastbox to remove the last box and then reinstate it,
5466 % because this resets how far the box has been \moveleft'ed to 0. \unvbox
5467 % doesn't affect \prevdepth either.
5469 \newdimen\entrylinedepth
5471 % Default is no penalty
5472 \let\entryorphanpenalty\egroup
5474 % Used from \printindex. \firsttoken should be the first token
5475 % after the \entry. If it's not another \entry, we are at the last
5476 % line of a group of index entries, so insert a penalty to discourage
5477 % orphaned index entries.
5478 \long\def\indexorphanpenalty{%
5479 \def\isentry{\entry}%
5480 \ifx\firsttoken\isentry
5482 \unskip\penalty 9000
5483 % The \unskip here stops breaking before the glue. It relies on the
5484 % \vskip above being there, otherwise there is an error
5485 % "You can't use `\unskip' in vertical mode". There has to be glue
5486 % in the current vertical list that hasn't been added to the
5487 % "current page". See Chapter 24 of the TeXbook. This contradicts
5488 % Section 8.3.7 in "TeX by Topic," though.
5490 \egroup % now comes the box added with \aftergroup
5493 % Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
5494 % The filll stretch here overpowers both the fil and fill stretch to push
5495 % the page number to the right.
5496 \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
5497 \hbox{$
\mathsurround=
0pt
\mkern1.5mu.
\mkern1.5mu$
}\hskip 1em plus
1filll
}
5500 \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
5502 \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=
0.5cm
5503 \def\secondary#1#2{{%
5508 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
5510 \pdfgettoks#2.\
\the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
5517 % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
5518 % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
5519 % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
5520 \catcode`\@=
11 % private names
5523 \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
5524 \newdimen\doublecolumntopgap
5525 \doublecolumntopgap =
0pt
5527 % Use inside an output routine to save \topmark and \firstmark
5529 \global\savedtopmark=
\expandafter{\topmark }%
5530 \global\savedfirstmark=
\expandafter{\firstmark }%
5532 \newtoks\savedtopmark
5533 \newtoks\savedfirstmark
5535 % Set \topmark and \firstmark for next time \output runs.
5536 % Can't be run from withinside \output (because any material
5537 % added while an output routine is active, including
5538 % penalties, is saved for after it finishes). The page so far
5539 % should be empty, otherwise what's on it will be thrown away.
5541 \mark{\the\savedtopmark}%
5543 \setbox\dummybox=
\box\PAGE
5545 % "abc" because output routine doesn't fire for a completely empty page.
5546 \mark{\the\savedfirstmark}%
5549 \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
5550 % If not much space left on page, start a new page.
5551 \ifdim\pagetotal>
0.8\vsize\vfill\eject\fi
5553 % Grab any single-column material above us.
5556 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
5557 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
5558 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
5559 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
5560 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
5561 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
5562 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
5563 \ifvoid\partialpage \else
5564 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
5567 \global\setbox\partialpage =
\vbox{%
5568 % Unvbox the main output page.
5570 \kern-
\topskip \kern\baselineskip
5574 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
5577 % We recover the two marks that the last output routine saved in order
5578 % to propagate the information in marks added around a chapter heading,
5579 % which could be otherwise be lost by the time the final page is output.
5582 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
5583 \output =
{\doublecolumnout}%
5585 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
5586 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
5587 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
5588 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
5589 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
5591 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
5592 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
5593 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
5594 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
5595 % as it did when we hard-coded it.
5597 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
5598 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
5601 \doublecolumnhsize =
\hsize
5602 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -
.04154\hsize
5603 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by
2
5604 \hsize =
\doublecolumnhsize
5606 % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
5607 % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
5608 \global\doublecolumntopgap =
\topskip
5609 \global\advance\doublecolumntopgap by -
1\baselineskip
5610 \advance\vsize by -
1\doublecolumntopgap
5613 \global\entrylinedepth=
0pt
\relax
5616 % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
5617 % the last, which is done by \balancecolumns.
5619 \def\doublecolumnout{%
5621 \splittopskip=
\topskip \splitmaxdepth=
\maxdepth
5622 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
5623 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
5627 \advance\dimen@ by -
\ht\partialpage
5629 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
5630 \setbox0=
\vsplit255 to
\dimen@
\setbox2=
\vsplit255 to
\dimen@
5631 \onepageout\pagesofar
5633 \penalty\outputpenalty
5636 % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
5637 % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
5641 \hsize =
\doublecolumnhsize
5642 \wd0=
\hsize \wd2=
\hsize
5644 \vskip\doublecolumntopgap
5645 \hbox to
\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}}%
5649 % Finished with with double columns.
5650 \def\enddoublecolumns{%
5651 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
5652 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the
5653 % following situation:
5655 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
5656 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
5657 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last
5658 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
5659 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following
5660 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
5661 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
5662 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
5663 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
5664 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
5665 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as
5666 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
5667 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
5668 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
5669 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
5670 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
5671 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
5672 % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see
5673 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
5675 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
5676 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
5680 % Split the last of the double-column material.
5684 % Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
5685 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
5686 % definition right away.
5687 \global\output =
{\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
5690 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
5692 % Leave the double-column material on the current page, no automatic
5694 \box\balancedcolumns
5696 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
5697 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
5698 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
5699 % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
5702 \newbox\balancedcolumns
5703 \setbox\balancedcolumns=
\vbox{shouldnt see this
}%
5705 % Only called for the last of the double column material. \doublecolumnout
5707 \def\balancecolumns{%
5708 \setbox0 =
\vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
5710 \advance\dimen@ by
\topskip
5711 \advance\dimen@ by-
\baselineskip
5712 \ifdim\dimen@<
14\baselineskip
5713 % Don't split a short final column in two.
5716 \divide\dimen@ by
2 % target to split to
5718 \splittopskip =
\topskip
5719 % Loop until the second column is no higher than the first
5723 \global\setbox3 =
\copy0
5724 \global\setbox1 =
\vsplit3 to
\dimen@
5725 % Remove glue from bottom of first column to
5726 % make sure it is higher than the second.
5727 \global\setbox1 =
\vbox{\unvbox1\unpenalty\unskip}%
5729 \global\advance\dimen@ by
1pt
5732 \multiply\dimen@ii by
4
5733 \divide\dimen@ii by
5
5734 \ifdim\ht3<
\dimen@ii
5735 % Column heights are too different, so don't make their bottoms
5736 % flush with each other. The glue at the end of the second column
5737 % allows a second column to stretch, reducing the difference in
5738 % height between the two.
5739 \setbox0=
\vbox to
\dimen@
{\unvbox1\vfill}%
5740 \setbox2=
\vbox to
\dimen@
{\unvbox3\vskip 0pt plus
0.3\ht0}%
5742 \setbox0=
\vbox to
\dimen@
{\unvbox1}%
5743 \setbox2=
\vbox to
\dimen@
{\unvbox3}%
5747 \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=
\vbox{\pagesofar}%
5749 \catcode`\@ =
\other
5752 \message{sectioning,
}
5753 % Chapters, sections, etc.
5755 % Let's start with @part.
5756 \outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}}
5760 \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit
5762 \noindent \titlefonts\rmisbold #1\par % the text
5763 \let\lastnode=
\empty % no node to associate with
5764 \writetocentry{part
}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc
5765 \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page
5766 % This outputs a mark at the end of the page that clears \thischapter
5767 % and \thissection, as is done in \startcontents.
5768 \let\pchapsepmacro\relax
5769 \chapmacro{}{Yomitfromtoc
}{}%
5774 % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered
5775 % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
5776 % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
5777 % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
5778 % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
5779 \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno =
10000
5781 \newcount\secno \secno=
0
5782 \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=
0
5783 \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=
0
5785 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
5786 \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
5788 % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
5789 % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
5790 % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
5791 % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
5793 \def\appendixletter{%
5794 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A
%
5795 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B
%
5796 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C
%
5797 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D
%
5798 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E
%
5799 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F
%
5800 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G
%
5801 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H
%
5802 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I
%
5803 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J
%
5804 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K
%
5805 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L
%
5806 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M
%
5807 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N
%
5808 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O
%
5809 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P
%
5810 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q
%
5811 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R
%
5812 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S
%
5813 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T
%
5814 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U
%
5815 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V
%
5816 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W
%
5817 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X
%
5818 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y
%
5819 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z
%
5820 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
5821 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
5822 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
5823 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
5824 \else\char\the\appendixno
5825 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
5826 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
5828 % Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
5829 % and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use
5830 % these. @section does likewise.
5832 \def\thischapternum{}
5833 \def\thischaptername{}
5835 \def\thissectionnum{}
5836 \def\thissectionname{}
5838 \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
5839 \newcount\secbase\secbase=
0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
5841 % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
5842 \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -
1}
5843 \let\up=
\raisesections % original BFox name
5845 % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
5846 \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by
1}
5847 \let\down=
\lowersections % original BFox name
5849 % we only have subsub.
5850 \chardef\maxseclevel =
3
5852 % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
5853 % To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
5854 \chardef\unnlevel =
\maxseclevel
5856 % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
5857 % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
5858 \def\chapheadtype{N
}
5860 % Choose a heading macro
5861 % #1 is heading type
5862 % #2 is heading level
5863 % #3 is text for heading
5864 \def\genhead#1#2#3{%
5865 % Compute the abs. sec. level:
5867 \advance\absseclevel by
\secbase
5868 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
5869 \ifnum \absseclevel <
0
5872 \ifnum \absseclevel >
3
5879 \ifnum \absseclevel <
\unnlevel
5880 \chardef\unnlevel =
\absseclevel
5883 % Check for appendix sections:
5884 \ifnum \absseclevel =
0
5885 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
5887 \if \headtype A
\if \chapheadtype N
%
5888 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter
}%
5891 % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
5892 \ifnum \absseclevel >
\unnlevel
5895 \chardef\unnlevel =
3
5898 % Now print the heading:
5902 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
5903 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
5904 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
5910 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
5911 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
5912 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
5918 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
5919 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
5923 \suppressfirstparagraphindent
5927 \def\numhead{\genhead N
}
5928 \def\apphead{\genhead A
}
5929 \def\unnmhead{\genhead U
}
5931 % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
5932 % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
5934 % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
5935 % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
5936 \let\chaplevelprefix =
\empty
5938 \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
5940 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
5941 % as an @include file.
5942 \global\secno=
0 \global\subsecno=
0 \global\subsubsecno=
0
5943 \global\advance\chapno by
1
5946 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.
}%
5949 % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations.
5950 \toks0=
\expandafter{\putwordChapter}%
5951 \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}%
5953 % Write the actual heading.
5954 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered
}{\the\chapno}%
5956 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
5957 \global\let\section =
\numberedsec
5958 \global\let\subsection =
\numberedsubsec
5959 \global\let\subsubsection =
\numberedsubsubsec
5962 \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz
5964 \def\appendixzzz#1{%
5965 \global\secno=
0 \global\subsecno=
0 \global\subsubsecno=
0
5966 \global\advance\appendixno by
1
5967 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.
}%
5970 % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations.
5971 \toks0=
\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}%
5972 \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}%
5974 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix
}{\appendixletter}%
5976 \global\let\section =
\appendixsec
5977 \global\let\subsection =
\appendixsubsec
5978 \global\let\subsubsection =
\appendixsubsubsec
5981 % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz:
5982 \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}}
5983 \def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
5984 \global\secno=
0 \global\subsecno=
0 \global\subsubsecno=
0
5985 \global\advance\unnumberedno by
1
5987 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
5988 \global\let\chaplevelprefix =
\empty
5991 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
5992 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
5993 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
5994 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
5995 % to be executed, not expanded).
5997 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
5998 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
5999 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
6000 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
6003 \message{(
\the\toks0)
}%
6005 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing
}{\the\unnumberedno}%
6007 \global\let\section =
\unnumberedsec
6008 \global\let\subsection =
\unnumberedsubsec
6009 \global\let\subsubsection =
\unnumberedsubsubsec
6012 % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
6013 \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
6014 \let\centerparametersmaybe =
\centerparameters
6016 \let\centerparametersmaybe =
\relax
6019 % @top is like @unnumbered.
6024 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
6026 \global\subsecno=
0 \global\subsubsecno=
0 \global\advance\secno by
1
6027 \sectionheading{#1}{sec
}{Ynumbered
}{\the\chapno.
\the\secno}%
6030 % normally calls appendixsectionzzz:
6031 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}}
6032 \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
6033 \global\subsecno=
0 \global\subsubsecno=
0 \global\advance\secno by
1
6034 \sectionheading{#1}{sec
}{Yappendix
}{\appendixletter.
\the\secno}%
6036 \let\appendixsec\appendixsection
6038 % normally calls unnumberedseczzz:
6039 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}}
6040 \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
6041 \global\subsecno=
0 \global\subsubsecno=
0 \global\advance\secno by
1
6042 \sectionheading{#1}{sec
}{Ynothing
}{\the\unnumberedno.
\the\secno}%
6047 % normally calls numberedsubseczzz:
6048 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}}
6049 \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
6050 \global\subsubsecno=
0 \global\advance\subsecno by
1
6051 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec
}{Ynumbered
}{\the\chapno.
\the\secno.
\the\subsecno}%
6054 % normally calls appendixsubseczzz:
6055 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}}
6056 \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
6057 \global\subsubsecno=
0 \global\advance\subsecno by
1
6058 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec
}{Yappendix
}%
6059 {\appendixletter.
\the\secno.
\the\subsecno}%
6062 % normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz:
6063 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}}
6064 \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
6065 \global\subsubsecno=
0 \global\advance\subsecno by
1
6066 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec
}{Ynothing
}%
6067 {\the\unnumberedno.
\the\secno.
\the\subsecno}%
6072 % normally numberedsubsubseczzz:
6073 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}}
6074 \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
6075 \global\advance\subsubsecno by
1
6076 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec
}{Ynumbered
}%
6077 {\the\chapno.
\the\secno.
\the\subsecno.
\the\subsubsecno}%
6080 % normally appendixsubsubseczzz:
6081 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}}
6082 \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
6083 \global\advance\subsubsecno by
1
6084 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec
}{Yappendix
}%
6085 {\appendixletter.
\the\secno.
\the\subsecno.
\the\subsubsecno}%
6088 % normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz:
6089 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}}
6090 \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
6091 \global\advance\subsubsecno by
1
6092 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec
}{Ynothing
}%
6093 {\the\unnumberedno.
\the\secno.
\the\subsecno.
\the\subsubsecno}%
6096 % These macros control what the section commands do, according
6097 % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
6098 % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
6099 \let\section =
\numberedsec
6100 \let\subsection =
\numberedsubsec
6101 \let\subsubsection =
\numberedsubsubsec
6103 % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
6106 {\advance\chapheadingskip by
10pt
\chapbreak }%
6107 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
6110 \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
6111 \def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
6112 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
6113 \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
6114 \suppressfirstparagraphindent
6117 % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
6118 \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec
}{Yomitfromtoc
}{}
6119 \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
6120 \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec
}{Yomitfromtoc
}{}
6121 \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
6122 \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec
}{Yomitfromtoc
}{}
6123 \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
6125 % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
6126 % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
6127 % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
6129 % Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
6130 \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<
#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
6132 % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
6133 \newskip\chapheadingskip
6135 % Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it.
6136 \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-
4000}}
6139 \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
6141 % \chapoddpage - start on an odd page for a new chapter
6142 % Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
6143 % get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't
6144 % care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
6156 \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG
#1\endcsname}
6159 \global\let\contentsalignmacro =
\chappager
6160 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=
\chapbreak
6161 \global\let\pagealignmacro=
\chappager}
6164 \global\let\contentsalignmacro =
\chappager
6165 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=
\chappager
6166 \global\let\pagealignmacro=
\chappager
6167 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
6170 \global\let\contentsalignmacro =
\chapoddpage
6171 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=
\chapoddpage
6172 \global\let\pagealignmacro=
\chapoddpage
6173 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
6177 % \chapmacro - Chapter opening.
6179 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
6180 % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
6181 % Not used for @heading series.
6183 % To test against our argument.
6184 \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing
}
6185 \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix
}
6186 \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc
}
6188 \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
6189 \expandafter\ifx\thisenv\titlepage\else
6190 \checkenv{}% chapters, etc., should not start inside an environment.
6192 % FIXME: \chapmacro is currently called from inside \titlepage when
6193 % \setcontentsaftertitlepage to print the "Table of Contents" heading, but
6194 % this should probably be done by \sectionheading with an option to print
6197 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
6198 \let\prevchapterdefs=
\lastchapterdefs
6199 \let\prevsectiondefs=
\lastsectiondefs
6200 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
6201 \gdef\thissection{}}%
6204 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
6205 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
6206 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
6207 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
6208 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
6209 \gdef\thischapter{}}%
6210 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
6212 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
6213 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
6214 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
6215 % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible
6216 % commands in some of the translations.
6217 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{}
6218 \noexpand\thischapternum:
6219 \noexpand\thischaptername}%
6223 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
6224 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
6225 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
6226 % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible
6227 % commands in some of the translations.
6228 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{}
6229 \noexpand\thischapternum:
6230 \noexpand\thischaptername}%
6234 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
6235 % the preceding space.
6238 % Insert the chapter heading break.
6241 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
6242 % between here and the heading.
6243 \let\prevchapterdefs=
\lastchapterdefs
6244 \let\prevsectiondefs=
\lastsectiondefs
6248 \chapfonts \rmisbold
6249 \let\footnote=
\errfootnoteheading % give better error message
6251 % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the
6252 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
6253 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
6254 \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
6256 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
6257 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
6258 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
6260 \def\toctype{unnchap
}%
6261 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
6262 \setbox0 =
\hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
6264 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
6265 \setbox0 =
\hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
6268 \setbox0 =
\hbox{#3\enspace}%
6269 \def\toctype{numchap
}%
6272 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
6273 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
6274 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
6275 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
6277 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
6278 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
6279 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
6280 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
6281 % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
6284 % Typeset the actual heading.
6285 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
6286 \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=
\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
6289 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
6293 % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
6294 \let\centerparametersmaybe =
\relax
6295 \def\centerparameters{%
6296 \advance\rightskip by
3\rightskip
6297 \leftskip =
\rightskip
6302 % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
6303 % updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03.
6305 \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF
#1\endcsname}
6307 \def\unnchfopen #1{%
6309 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
6310 \nobreak\bigskip\nobreak
6312 \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
6313 \vbox to
3in
{\vfil \hbox to
\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to
\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
6316 \def\centerchfopen #1{%
6318 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings \hfill #1\hfill}%
6319 \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
6322 \global\let\chapmacro=
\chfopen
6323 \global\let\centerchapmacro=
\centerchfopen}
6326 % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
6327 % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
6329 \newskip\secheadingskip
6330 \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-
1000}}
6332 % Subsection titles.
6333 \newskip\subsecheadingskip
6334 \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-
500}}
6336 % Subsubsection titles.
6337 \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
6338 \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
6341 % Print any size, any type, section title.
6343 % #1 is the text of the title,
6344 % #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec),
6345 % #3 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc),
6346 % #4 is the section number.
6348 \def\seckeyword{sec
}
6350 \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
6352 \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
6355 % It is ok for the @heading series commands to appear inside an
6356 % environment (it's been historically allowed, though the logic is
6357 % dubious), but not the others.
6358 \ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword\else
6359 \checkenv{}% non-@*heading should not be in an environment.
6361 \let\footnote=
\errfootnoteheading
6363 % Switch to the right set of fonts.
6364 \csname #2fonts
\endcsname \rmisbold
6366 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
6367 \let\prevsectiondefs=
\lastsectiondefs
6368 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
6369 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
6370 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
6371 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
6373 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
6374 % Don't redefine \thissection.
6375 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
6376 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
6378 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
6379 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
6380 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
6381 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
6382 % commands in some of the translations.
6383 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
6384 \noexpand\thissectionnum:
6385 \noexpand\thissectionname}%
6389 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
6391 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
6392 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
6393 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
6394 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
6395 % commands in some of the translations.
6396 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
6397 \noexpand\thissectionnum:
6398 \noexpand\thissectionname}%
6403 % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we
6404 % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph
6405 % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line.
6408 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
6409 % the preceding space.
6412 % Insert space above the heading.
6413 \csname #2headingbreak
\endcsname
6415 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
6416 % between here and the heading.
6417 \global\let\prevsectiondefs=
\lastsectiondefs
6420 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
6421 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
6424 \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
6425 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
6426 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
6427 % and don't redefine \lastsection.
6430 \let\sectionlevel=
\empty
6431 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
6432 \setbox0 =
\hbox{#4\enspace}%
6434 \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
6436 \setbox0 =
\hbox{#4\enspace}%
6438 \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
6441 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro.
6442 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
6444 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
6445 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
6448 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
6449 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
6450 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
6451 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that
6452 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
6453 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000.
6456 % Output the actual section heading.
6457 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=
10000 \tolerance=
5000 \parindent=
0pt
\ptexraggedright
6458 \hangindent=
\wd0 % zero if no section number
6461 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
6462 % Don't allow stretch, though.
6463 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip
\endcsname
6465 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
6466 % was followed by glue.
6469 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
6470 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
6471 % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next
6472 % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out
6473 % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically
6474 % obscuring the section heading with something else.
6477 % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known
6478 % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation
6479 % and do the needful.
6485 % Table of contents.
6488 % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
6489 % Called from @chapter, etc.
6491 % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
6492 % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
6493 % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
6494 % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
6495 % destination to jump to.
6497 % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
6498 % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
6499 % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
6500 % table of contents chapter openings themselves.
6502 \newif\iftocfileopened
6503 \def\omitkeyword{omit
}%
6505 \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
6506 \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
6507 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
6508 \iftocfileopened\else
6509 \immediate\openout\tocfile =
\jobname.toc
6510 \global\tocfileopenedtrue
6516 \write\tocfile{@
#1entry
{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
6522 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
6523 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
6524 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
6525 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
6526 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
6527 % `1', and two named `2'.
6528 \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
6532 % These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
6533 % fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant
6534 % with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
6536 \def\activecatcodes{%
6549 % Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
6553 \input \tocreadfilename
6556 \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=
1in
6557 \newcount\savepageno
6558 \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -
1
6560 % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
6562 \def\startcontents#1{%
6563 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
6564 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
6565 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
6566 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
6568 \immediate\closeout\tocfile
6570 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
6571 % It is abundantly clear what they are.
6572 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc
}{}%
6574 \savepageno =
\pageno
6575 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
6576 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
6577 \entryrightmargin=
\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
6579 % Roman numerals for page numbers.
6580 \ifnum \pageno>
0 \global\pageno =
\lastnegativepageno \fi
6583 % redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on
6584 % \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
6586 \def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc
}
6588 % Normal (long) toc.
6591 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
6592 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
6597 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
6603 \lastnegativepageno =
\pageno
6604 \global\pageno =
\savepageno
6607 % And just the chapters.
6608 \def\summarycontents{%
6609 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
6611 \let\partentry =
\shortpartentry
6612 \let\numchapentry =
\shortchapentry
6613 \let\appentry =
\shortchapentry
6614 \let\unnchapentry =
\shortunnchapentry
6615 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
6617 \let\rm=
\shortcontrm \let\bf=
\shortcontbf
6618 \let\sl=
\shortcontsl \let\tt=
\shortconttt
6620 \hyphenpenalty =
10000
6621 \advance\baselineskip by
1pt
% Open it up a little.
6622 \def\numsecentry#
#1#
#2#
#3#
#4{}
6623 \let\appsecentry =
\numsecentry
6624 \let\unnsecentry =
\numsecentry
6625 \let\numsubsecentry =
\numsecentry
6626 \let\appsubsecentry =
\numsecentry
6627 \let\unnsubsecentry =
\numsecentry
6628 \let\numsubsubsecentry =
\numsecentry
6629 \let\appsubsubsecentry =
\numsecentry
6630 \let\unnsubsubsecentry =
\numsecentry
6631 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
6637 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
6639 \lastnegativepageno =
\pageno
6640 \global\pageno =
\savepageno
6642 \let\shortcontents =
\summarycontents
6644 % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
6645 % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
6647 \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
6648 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
6649 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
6650 % But use \hss just in case.
6651 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
6652 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
6654 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
6655 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
6656 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
6657 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
6658 % there are before deciding ...
6659 \hbox to
1em
{#1\hss}%
6662 % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
6663 % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
6664 % The last argument is the page number.
6665 % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
6667 % Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't
6668 % exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width.
6669 % Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed.
6670 \def\numeralbox{\setbox0=
\hbox{8}\hbox to
\wd0{\hfil}}
6671 \def\partentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}}
6673 % Parts, in the short toc.
6674 \def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{%
6676 \vskip.5\baselineskip plus
.15\baselineskip minus
.1\baselineskip
6677 \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}%
6680 % Chapters, in the main contents.
6681 \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6683 % Chapters, in the short toc.
6684 % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
6685 \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
6686 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
6689 % Appendices, in the main contents.
6690 % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
6692 \def\appendixbox#1{%
6693 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
6694 \setbox0 =
\hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M
}%
6695 \hbox to
\wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
6697 \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\hskip.7em
#1}{#4}}
6699 % Unnumbered chapters.
6700 \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
6701 \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
6704 \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6705 \let\appsecentry=
\numsecentry
6706 \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
6709 \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6710 \let\appsubsecentry=
\numsubsecentry
6711 \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
6713 % And subsubsections.
6714 \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
6715 \let\appsubsubsecentry=
\numsubsubsecentry
6716 \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
6718 % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
6719 % Same as \defaultparindent.
6720 \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent =
15pt
6722 % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
6725 % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
6726 % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
6727 \def\dochapentry#1#2{%
6728 \penalty-
300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus
.33\baselineskip minus
.25\baselineskip
6730 % Move the page numbers slightly to the right
6731 \advance\entryrightmargin by -
0.05em
6733 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
6735 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus
.1\baselineskip
6738 \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
6739 \secentryfonts \leftskip=
\tocindent
6740 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
6743 \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
6744 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=
2\tocindent
6745 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
6748 \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
6749 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=
3\tocindent
6750 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
6753 % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
6754 \let\tocentry =
\entry
6756 % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
6757 \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
6759 \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
6760 \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
6762 \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
6763 \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
6764 \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
6765 \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
6768 \message{environments,
}
6769 % @foo ... @end foo.
6771 % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily.
6772 % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
6773 % But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character.
6776 \setupmarkupstyle{tex
}%
6777 \catcode `\\=
0 \catcode `\
{=
1 \catcode `\
}=
2
6778 \catcode `\$=
3 \catcode `\&=
4 \catcode `\#=
6
6779 \catcode `\^=
7 \catcode `
\_=
8 \catcode `\~=
\active \let~=
\tie
6790 % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our
6791 % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions.
6794 % Inverse of the list at the beginning of the file.
6796 \let\bullet=
\ptexbullet
6801 \let\equiv=
\ptexequiv
6804 \let\indent=
\ptexindent
6805 \let\noindent=
\ptexnoindent
6812 %\let\sup=\ptexsup % do not redefine, we want @sup to work in math mode
6814 \expandafter \let\csname top
\endcsname=
\ptextop % we've made it outer
6815 \let\frenchspacing=
\plainfrenchspacing
6817 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
6818 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$
\mathsurround=
0pt
\endldots\,$
\fi}%
6821 % There is no need to define \Etex.
6823 % Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
6824 % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
6825 % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
6827 % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
6828 \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=
0.4in
6830 % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
6831 % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
6833 \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
6835 % This space is always present above and below environments.
6836 \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount =
0pt
6838 % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
6839 % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
6840 % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
6841 % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
6843 \def\aboveenvbreak{{%
6844 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
6845 % \sectionheading, q.v.
6846 \ifnum \lastpenalty=
10000 \else
6847 \advance\envskipamount by
\parskip
6849 \ifdim\lastskip<
\envskipamount
6851 \ifnum\lastpenalty<
10000
6852 % Penalize breaking before the environment, because preceding text
6853 % often leads into it.
6856 \vskip\envskipamount
6861 \def\afterenvbreak{{%
6862 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
6863 % \sectionheading, q.v.
6864 \ifnum \lastpenalty=
10000 \else
6865 \advance\envskipamount by
\parskip
6867 \ifdim\lastskip<
\envskipamount
6869 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
6871 \ifnum\lastpenalty<
10000 \penalty-
50 \fi
6872 \vskip\envskipamount
6877 % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
6878 % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
6879 \let\nonarrowing=
\relax
6881 % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
6882 % environment contents.
6883 \font\circle=lcircle10
6885 \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
6886 \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
6887 \circthick=
\fontdimen8\circle
6889 \def\ctl{{\circle\char'
013\hskip -
6pt
}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
6890 \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt
\circle\char'
010}}
6891 \def\cbl{{\circle\char'
012\hskip -
6pt
}}
6892 \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt
\circle\char'
011}}
6893 \def\carttop{\hbox to
\cartouter{\hskip\lskip
6894 \ctl\leaders\hrule height
\circthick\hfil\ctr
6896 \def\cartbot{\hbox to
\cartouter{\hskip\lskip
6897 \cbl\leaders\hrule height
\circthick\hfil\cbr
6900 \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
6903 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
6905 \lskip=
\leftskip \rskip=
\rightskip
6906 \leftskip=
0pt
\rightskip=
0pt
% we want these *outside*.
6907 \cartinner=
\hsize \advance\cartinner by-
\lskip
6908 \advance\cartinner by-
\rskip
6910 \advance\cartouter by
18.4pt
% allow for 3pt kerns on either
6911 % side, and for 6pt waste from
6912 % each corner char, and rule thickness
6913 \normbskip=
\baselineskip \normpskip=
\parskip \normlskip=
\lineskip
6915 % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the
6916 % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can
6917 % collide with the section heading.
6918 \ifnum\lastpenalty>
10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi
6920 \setbox\groupbox=
\vbox\bgroup
6921 \baselineskip=
0pt
\parskip=
0pt
\lineskip=
0pt
6929 \baselineskip=
\normbskip
6930 \lineskip=
\normlskip
6933 \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group.
6949 % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
6951 \newdimen\nonfillparindent
6954 \ifdim\hfuzz <
12pt
\hfuzz =
12pt
\fi % Don't be fussy
6955 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
6956 \let\par =
\lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
6957 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
6959 % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate
6960 % the normal \indent.
6961 \nonfillparindent=
\parindent
6963 \let\indent\nonfillindent
6965 \emergencystretch =
0pt
% don't try to avoid overfull boxes
6966 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
6967 \advance \leftskip by
\lispnarrowing
6968 \exdentamount=
\lispnarrowing
6970 \let\nonarrowing =
\relax
6972 \let\exdent=
\nofillexdent
6977 % We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake
6978 % @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally
6979 % active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after
6981 \gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}%
6982 \gdef\nonfillindentcheck{%
6984 \expandafter\nonfillindentgobble%
6986 \leavevmode\nonfillindentbox%
6990 \def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent}
6991 \def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to
\nonfillparindent{\hss}}
6993 % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
6994 % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
6995 % This affects the following displayed environments:
6996 % @example, @display, @format, @lisp
6998 \def\smallword{small
}
6999 \def\nosmallword{nosmall
}
7000 \let\SETdispenvsize\relax
7001 \def\setnormaldispenv{%
7002 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
7003 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
7004 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
7005 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
7006 % to change the fonts afterward.
7007 \ifnum \lastpenalty=
10000 \else \endgraf \fi
7008 \smallexamplefonts \rm
7011 \def\setsmalldispenv{%
7012 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
7014 \ifnum \lastpenalty=
10000 \else \endgraf \fi
7015 \smallexamplefonts \rm
7019 % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
7020 % Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition.
7021 \def\makedispenvdef#1#2{%
7022 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}%
7023 \expandafter\envdef\csname small
#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}%
7024 \expandafter\let\csname E
#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
7025 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall
#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
7028 % Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment.
7029 \def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{%
7030 \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}%
7031 \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}%
7034 % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font;
7035 % @example: same as @lisp.
7037 % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
7038 % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
7040 \maketwodispenvdef{lisp
}{example
}{%
7042 \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example
}%
7043 \let\kbdfont =
\kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
7044 \gobble % eat return
7046 % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
7048 \makedispenvdef{display
}{%
7053 % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
7055 \makedispenvdef{format
}{%
7056 \let\nonarrowing = t
%
7061 % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
7063 \let\nonarrowing = t
%
7067 \let\Eflushleft =
\afterenvbreak
7071 \envdef\flushright{%
7072 \let\nonarrowing = t
%
7074 \advance\leftskip by
0pt plus
1fill
\relax
7077 \let\Eflushright =
\afterenvbreak
7080 % @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right
7081 % justification. From plain.tex. Don't stretch around special
7082 % characters in urls in this environment, since the stretch at the right
7084 \envdef\raggedright{%
7085 \rightskip0pt plus2.4em
\spaceskip.3333em
\xspaceskip.5em
\relax
7086 \def\urefprestretchamount{0pt
}%
7087 \def\urefpoststretchamount{0pt
}%
7089 \let\Eraggedright\par
7091 \envdef\raggedleft{%
7092 \parindent=
0pt
\leftskip0pt plus2em
7093 \spaceskip.3333em
\xspaceskip.5em
\parfillskip=
0pt
7094 \hbadness=
10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
7095 % badness reporting.
7097 \let\Eraggedleft\par
7099 \envdef\raggedcenter{%
7100 \parindent=
0pt
\rightskip0pt plus1em
\leftskip0pt plus1em
7101 \spaceskip.3333em
\xspaceskip.5em
\parfillskip=
0pt
7102 \hbadness=
10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
7103 % badness reporting.
7105 \let\Eraggedcenter\par
7108 % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
7109 % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
7110 % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
7111 % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
7113 \makedispenvdef{quotation
}{\quotationstart}
7115 \def\quotationstart{%
7116 \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too.
7117 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
7118 \advance\rightskip by
\lispnarrowing
7120 \parsearg\quotationlabel
7123 % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
7124 % doing normal filling.
7128 \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else
7130 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---
\quotationauthor}%
7132 {\parskip=
0pt
\afterenvbreak}%
7134 \def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation}
7136 % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
7137 \def\quotationlabel#1{%
7139 \ifx\temp\empty \else
7144 % @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and
7145 % has no optional argument.
7147 \makedispenvdef{indentedblock
}{\indentedblockstart}
7149 \def\indentedblockstart{%
7150 {\parskip=
0pt
\aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
7153 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
7154 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
7155 \advance\leftskip by
\lispnarrowing
7156 \exdentamount =
\lispnarrowing
7158 \let\nonarrowing =
\relax
7162 % Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling.
7164 \def\Eindentedblock{%
7166 {\parskip=
0pt
\afterenvbreak}%
7168 \def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock}
7171 % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
7172 % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
7173 % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
7174 % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
7176 % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
7178 % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
7179 % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
7182 \do\
\do\\
\do\
{\do\
}\do\$
\do\&
%
7183 \do\#
\do\^
\do\^^K
\do\_\do\^^A
\do\%
\do\~
%
7184 \do\<
\do\>
\do\|
\do\@
\do+
\do\"
%
7185 % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
7186 % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
7187 % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
7192 \def\uncatcodespecials{%
7193 \def\do#
#1{\catcode`#
#1=
\other}\dospecials}
7195 % Setup for the @verb command.
7197 % Eight spaces for a tab
7199 \catcode`\^^I=
\active
7200 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=
\active\def^^I
{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \
}}
7204 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
7205 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
7206 \setupmarkupstyle{verb
}%
7208 % Respect line breaks,
7209 % print special symbols as themselves, and
7210 % make each space count
7211 % must do in this order:
7212 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
7215 % Setup for the @verbatim environment
7217 % Real tab expansion.
7218 \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=
\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=
8\wd0 % tab amount
7220 % We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle
7221 % tabs. The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent,
7222 % or some other command that starts with a begin-group. Otherwise, the
7223 % entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before
7224 % it is typeset. Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands
7225 % (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself.
7227 \def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=
\hbox\bgroup}
7230 \catcode`\^^I=
\active
7232 \catcode`\^^I=
\active
7233 \def^^I
{\leavevmode\egroup
7234 \dimen\verbbox=
\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab
7235 \divide\dimen\verbbox by
\tabw
7236 \multiply\dimen\verbbox by
\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
7237 \advance\dimen\verbbox by
\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
7238 \wd\verbbox=
\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox
7243 % start the verbatim environment.
7244 \def\setupverbatim{%
7245 \let\nonarrowing = t
%
7247 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
7248 % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines. Otherwise, we would
7249 % never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode.
7250 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}%
7252 \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim
}%
7253 % Respect line breaks,
7254 % print special symbols as themselves, and
7255 % make each space count.
7256 % Must do in this order:
7257 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
7258 \everypar{\starttabbox}%
7261 % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
7262 % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
7263 % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
7265 % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
7267 % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
7269 \catcode`
[=
1\catcode`
]=
2\catcode`\
{=
\other\catcode`\
}=
\other
7270 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next#
#1#1}[#
#1\endgroup]\next]
7273 \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
7276 % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
7277 % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
7279 % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
7281 % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
7282 % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
7283 % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
7285 % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
7290 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
7291 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
7292 % line in the output.
7293 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M
#2@end verbatim
{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim
}%
7294 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
7295 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
7299 \setupverbatim\doverbatim
7301 \let\Everbatim =
\afterenvbreak
7304 % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
7306 \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
7308 \def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
7310 \makevalueexpandable
7312 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
7313 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of
#1^^J
}%
7319 % @copying ... @end copying.
7320 % Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
7322 % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
7323 % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
7324 % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
7325 % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
7326 % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
7327 % possible is desirable.
7329 \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
7330 \def\docopying#1@end copying
{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
7332 \def\insertcopying{%
7334 \parindent =
0pt
% paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
7335 \scanexp\copyingtext
7343 \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=
.4in
7344 \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=
50pt
7345 \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=
18pt
7346 \newcount\defunpenalty
7348 % Start the processing of @deffn:
7350 \ifnum\lastpenalty<
10000
7352 \defunpenalty=
10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
7353 % following @def command, see below.
7355 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
7356 % which is there to keep the function description together with its
7357 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
7358 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
7359 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
7360 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
7361 % a break between a section heading and a defun.
7363 % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
7364 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
7365 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
7367 \ifnum\lastpenalty=
10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=
10002 \fi
7369 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
7370 % But do insert the glue.
7371 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
7375 \advance\leftskip by
\defbodyindent
7376 \exdentamount=
\defbodyindent
7380 % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
7383 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
7384 % It's not a great place, though.
7385 \ifnum\lastpenalty=
10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=
10002 \fi
7387 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
7388 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
7390 \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
7392 % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
7394 \def\printdefunline#1#2{%
7396 % call \deffnheader:
7399 \interlinepenalty =
10000
7400 \advance\rightskip by
0pt plus
1fil
\relax
7402 \nobreak\vskip -
\parskip
7403 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
7404 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
7405 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
7410 \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
7412 % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
7413 % the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
7416 \expandafter\let\csname E
#1\endcsname =
\Edefun
7417 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
7418 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x
}\makecsname{#1header
}}%
7422 % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader { (defn. of \deffnheader) }
7424 % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
7425 % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
7427 \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
7430 \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else
7431 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
7433 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
7437 \newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function?
7438 \newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line?
7440 % @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions
7441 % are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun,
7442 % @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod.
7444 \parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{%
7447 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl
\endcsname
7449 \else\ifx\temp\offword
7450 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl
\endcsname
7453 \errhelp =
\EMsimple
7454 \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `
\temp',
7459 % Untyped functions:
7461 % @deffn category name args
7462 \makedefun{deffn
}{\deffngeneral{}}
7464 % @deffn category class name args
7465 \makedefun{defop
}#1 {\defopon{#1\
\putwordon}}
7467 % \defopon {category on}class name args
7468 \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\
\code{#2}}{#1\
\code{#2}} }
7470 % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
7472 \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
7473 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
7474 \dosubind{fn
}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
7475 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
7480 % @deftypefn category type name args
7481 \makedefun{deftypefn
}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
7483 % @deftypeop category class type name args
7484 \makedefun{deftypeop
}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\
\putwordon}}
7486 % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
7487 \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\
\code{#2}}{#1\
\code{#2}} }
7489 % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
7491 \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
7492 \dosubind{fn
}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
7494 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
7499 % @deftypevr category type var args
7500 \makedefun{deftypevr
}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
7502 % @deftypecv category class type var args
7503 \makedefun{deftypecv
}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\
\putwordof}}
7505 % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
7506 \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\
\code{#2}}{#1\
\code{#2}} }
7508 % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
7510 \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
7511 \dosubind{vr
}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
7512 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
7515 % Untyped variables:
7517 % @defvr category var args
7518 \makedefun{defvr
}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
7520 % @defcv category class var args
7521 \makedefun{defcv
}#1 {\defcvof{#1\
\putwordof}}
7523 % \defcvof {category of}class var args
7524 \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
7528 % @deftp category name args
7529 \makedefun{deftp
}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
7530 \doind{tp
}{\code{#2}}%
7531 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
7534 % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
7535 \makedefun{defun
}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
7536 \makedefun{defmac
}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
7537 \makedefun{defspec
}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
7538 \makedefun{deftypefun
}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
7539 \makedefun{defvar
}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
7540 \makedefun{defopt
}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
7541 \makedefun{deftypevar
}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
7542 \makedefun{defmethod
}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
7543 \makedefun{deftypemethod
}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
7544 \makedefun{defivar
}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
7545 \makedefun{deftypeivar
}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
7547 % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
7548 % #1 is the category, such as "Function".
7549 % #2 is the return type, if any.
7550 % #3 is the function name.
7552 % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
7554 \def\defname#1#2#3{%
7556 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
7557 \advance\leftskip by -
\defbodyindent
7559 % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function
7560 % on a line by itself.
7561 \rettypeownlinefalse
7562 \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically?
7563 % then check user option for putting return type on its own line:
7564 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl
\endcsname\relax \else
7569 % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps
7570 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
7573 \setbox0=
\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
7575 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at
7579 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
7580 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
7581 \dimen0=
\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -
\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by
\rightskip
7583 % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line.
7585 \advance\tempnum by
1
7586 \def\maybeshapeline{0in
\hsize}%
7588 \def\maybeshapeline{}%
7591 % The continuations:
7592 \dimen2=
\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -
\defargsindent
7594 % The final paragraph shape:
7595 \parshape \tempnum 0in
\dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2
7597 % Put the category name at the right margin.
7600 \hfil\box0 \kern-
\hsize
7601 % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
7603 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
7606 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
7607 \tolerance=
10000 \hbadness=
10000
7608 \exdentamount=
\defbodyindent
7610 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
7611 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
7612 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
7613 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
7614 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
7615 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
7616 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
7617 % one has made identifiers using them :).
7619 \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type
7620 \ifx\temp\empty\else
7621 \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type
7623 % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following:
7624 \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break
7626 \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space
7628 \fi % no return type
7629 #3% output function name
7631 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
7634 % arguments will be output next, if any.
7637 % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
7638 % tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
7639 % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
7640 % distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
7643 % use sl by default (not ttsl),
7645 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=
0
7647 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
7648 % want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so
7649 % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter.
7650 % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen
7651 % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`.
7652 \def\var#
#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var
}\ttslanted{#
#1}}}%
7654 \sl\hyphenchar\font=
45
7657 % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
7660 \catcode`\(=
\active \catcode`\)=
\active
7661 \catcode`\
[=
\active \catcode`\
]=
\active
7665 % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
7666 \let\lparen = (
\let\rparen = )
7668 % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
7669 % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
7670 % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
7673 \global\let(=
\lparen \global\let)=
\rparen
7674 \global\let[=
\lbrack \global\let]=
\rbrack
7677 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=
\opnr\let)=
\clnr\let[=
\lbrb\let]=
\rbrb}
7678 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=
\amprm}
7681 \newcount\parencount
7683 % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
7685 \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\&
#1 }}
7689 % At the first level, print parens in roman,
7690 % otherwise use the default font.
7691 \ifnum \parencount=
1 \rm \fi
7693 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
7694 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
7698 \def\infirstlevel#1{%
7705 \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
7708 \global\advance\parencount by
1
7710 \infirstlevel \bfafterword
7715 \global\advance\parencount by -
1
7718 \newcount\brackcount
7720 \global\advance\brackcount by
1
7725 \global\advance\brackcount by -
1
7728 \def\checkparencounts{%
7729 \ifnum\parencount=
0 \else \badparencount \fi
7730 \ifnum\brackcount=
0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
7732 % these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
7733 % has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
7734 \def\badparencount{%
7735 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...
}%
7736 \global\parencount=
0
7738 \def\badbrackcount{%
7739 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...
}%
7740 \global\brackcount=
0
7747 % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
7748 % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
7749 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
7750 \newwrite\macscribble
7753 \immediate\openout\macscribble=
\jobname.tmp
7754 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
7755 \immediate\closeout\macscribble
7760 \let\aftermacroxxx\relax
7761 \def\aftermacro{\aftermacroxxx}
7763 % alias because \c means cedilla in @tex or @math
7766 % Used at the time of macro expansion.
7767 % Argument is macro body with arguments substituted
7770 \def\xprocessmacroarg{\eatspaces}%
7772 % Process the macro body under the current catcode regime.
7773 \scantokens{#1\texinfoc}\aftermacro%
7775 % The \c is to remove the \newlinechar added by \scantokens, and
7776 % can be noticed by \parsearg.
7777 % The \aftermacro allows a \comment at the end of the macro definition
7778 % to duplicate itself past the final \newlinechar added by \scantokens:
7779 % this is used in the definition of \group to comment out a newline. We
7780 % don't do the same for \c to support Texinfo files with macros that ended
7781 % with a @c, which should no longer be necessary.
7782 % We avoid surrounding the call to \scantokens with \bgroup and \egroup
7783 % to allow macros to open or close groups themselves.
7786 % Used for copying and captions
7789 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \printindex
7790 % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
7791 % backslash to get it printed correctly.
7792 % FIXME: This may not be needed.
7793 %\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
7794 \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
7799 \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
7800 \newtoks\macname % Macro name
7801 \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
7803 % List of all defined macros in the form
7804 % \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
7805 % Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
7806 % if there is a need.
7809 % Add the macro to \macrolist
7810 \def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
7811 \def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
7812 \toks0 =
\expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
7813 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
7817 % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
7818 % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
7819 % (except of course we have to play expansion games).
7823 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
7827 % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
7828 % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
7830 \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@
\expandafter{#1 }}
7831 \gdef\trim@
#1{\trim@@ @
#1 @
#1 @ @@
}
7832 \gdef\trim@@
#1@
#2@
#3@@
{\trim@@@
\empty #2 @
}
7834 \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@
#1 } #2@
{#1}
7837 % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
7838 {\catcode`\^^M=
\other \catcode`
\Q=
3%
7839 \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ
}%
7840 \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ
{\eatcrb#1Q
}%
7841 \gdef\eatcrb#1Q
#2Q
{#1}%
7844 % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
7845 % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
7846 % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \
7847 % to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash.
7849 % Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
7850 % them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to
7851 % confine the change to the current group.
7853 % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
7854 % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
7855 % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
7857 \def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine
7866 \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setcharscatcodeothernonglobal \fi
7869 \def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros.
7873 \catcode`\^^M=
\other
7876 \def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions
7882 \catcode`\^^M=
\other
7886 % Used when scanning braced macro arguments. Note, however, that catcode
7887 % changes here are ineffectual if the macro invocation was nested inside
7888 % an argument to another Texinfo command.
7892 \catcode`\^^M=
\other
7896 \def\macrolineargctxt{% used for whole-line arguments without braces
7902 % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
7903 % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
7904 % where N is the macro parameter number.
7905 % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
7906 % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
7908 {\catcode`@=
0 @catcode`@\=@active
7909 @gdef@usembodybackslash
{@let\=@mbodybackslash
}
7910 @gdef@mbodybackslash
#1\
{@csname macarg.
#1@endcsname
}
7912 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.
\endcsname{\realbackslash}
7914 \def\margbackslash#1{\char`\
#1 }
7916 \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
7917 \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
7920 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
7921 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
7924 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;
%
7925 \if\paramno>
256\relax
7926 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
7927 \errhelp =
\EMsimple
7928 \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than
256 arguments
}
7932 \if1\csname ismacro.
\the\macname\endcsname
7933 \message{Warning: redefining
\the\macname}%
7935 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
7936 \else \errmessage{Macro name
\the\macname\space already defined
}\fi
7937 \global\cslet{macsave.
\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
7938 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.
\the\macname\endcsname=
1%
7939 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
7941 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
7942 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
7943 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
7946 \parseargdef\unmacro{%
7947 \if1\csname ismacro.
#1\endcsname
7948 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.
#1}%
7949 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.
#1\endcsname=
0%
7950 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
7952 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
7953 \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
7954 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
7957 \errmessage{Macro
#1 not defined
}%
7961 % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
7962 % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
7968 \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
7972 % \getargs -- Parse the arguments to a @macro line. Set \macname to
7973 % the name of the macro, and \argl to the braced argument list.
7974 \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
7975 \def\getargsxxx#1#
{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
7976 \def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname=
{#1}}
7977 \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
7978 % This made use of the feature that if the last token of a
7979 % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
7980 % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
7982 % Parse the optional {params} list to @macro or @rmacro.
7983 % Set \paramno to the number of arguments,
7984 % and \paramlist to a parameter text for the macro (e.g. #1,#2,#3 for a
7985 % three-param macro.) Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH in the params
7986 % list to some hook where the argument is to be expanded. If there are
7987 % less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N
7988 % is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be
7989 % defined `a la TeX in the macro body.
7991 % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
7993 % If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used: see
7994 % \parsemmanyargdef.
7996 \def\parsemargdef#1;
{%
7997 \paramno=
0\def\paramlist{}%
7999 % \hash is redefined to `#' later to get it into definitions
8000 \let\processmacroarg\relax
8001 \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,
%
8002 \ifnum\paramno<
10\relax\else
8004 \parsemmanyargdef@@
#1,;,
% 10 or more arguments
8007 \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,
{%
8008 \if#1;
\let\next=
\relax
8009 \else \let\next=
\parsemargdefxxx
8010 \advance\paramno by
1
8011 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.
\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
8012 {\processmacroarg{\hash\the\paramno}}%
8013 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,
}%
8016 % \parsemacbody, \parsermacbody
8018 % Read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. (They're different since
8019 % rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
8021 % We are in \macrobodyctxt, and the \xdef causes backslashshes in the macro
8022 % body to be transformed.
8023 % Set \macrobody to the body of the macro, and call \defmacro.
8025 {\catcode`\ =
\other\long\gdef\parsemacbody#1@end macro
{%
8026 \xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}%
8027 {\catcode`\ =
\other\long\gdef\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro
{%
8028 \xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}%
8030 % Make @ a letter, so that we can make private-to-Texinfo macro names.
8031 \edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@
}
8032 \catcode `@=
11\relax
8034 %%%%%%%%%%%%%% Code for > 10 arguments only %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
8036 % If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the
8037 % hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is
8038 % processed again to replace the arguments.
8040 % In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the
8041 % argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of
8042 % the catcode regime under which the body was input).
8044 % If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more
8045 % arguments, no macro can have more than 256 arguments (else error).
8047 % In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments
8048 % list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to
8049 % each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list
8050 % in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments
8051 % are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining
8052 % twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power.
8053 \def\parsemmanyargdef@@
#1,
{%
8054 \if#1;
\let\next=
\relax
8056 \let\next=
\parsemmanyargdef@@
8057 \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}%
8058 \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa
8059 \expandafter{\csname macarg.
\tempb\endcsname}%
8060 % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we
8061 % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an
8063 \expandafter\edef\tempa
8064 {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}%
8065 \advance\paramno by
1\relax
8072 \long\def\nillm@
{\nil@
}%
8074 % This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its
8075 % definition. It gets all the arguments' values and assigns them to macros
8078 % #1 is the macro name
8079 % #2 is the list of argument names
8080 % #3 is the list of argument values
8081 \def\getargvals@
#1#2#3{%
8082 \def\macargdeflist@
{}%
8083 \def\saveparamlist@
{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion.
8084 \def\paramlist{#2,
\nil@
}%
8088 \def\argvaluelist{#3,
\nil@
}%
8097 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
8098 % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty.
8099 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
8101 \errhelp =
\EMsimple
8102 \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `
\macroname'!
}%
8104 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
8106 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
8107 % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg
8109 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
8111 % pop current arg name into \@tempb
8112 \def\@tempa#
#1{\pop@
{\@tempb
}{\paramlist}#
#1\endargs@
}%
8113 \expandafter\@tempa
\expandafter{\paramlist}%
8114 % pop current argument value into \@tempc
8115 \def\@tempa#
#1{\longpop@
{\@tempc
}{\argvaluelist}#
#1\endargs@
}%
8116 \expandafter\@tempa
\expandafter{\argvaluelist}%
8117 % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value.
8118 % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd
8119 \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc
}%
8120 \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb
\endcsname\relax
8121 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe
\expandafter{%
8122 \csname macarg.\@tempb
\endcsname}%
8123 \edef\@tempd
{\long\def\@tempe
{\the\macname}}%
8124 \push@\@tempd
\macargdeflist@
8125 \let\next\getargvals@@
8132 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def
8133 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2%
8134 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
8138 % Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result
8141 \def\macvalstoargs@
{%
8142 % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed
8143 % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument
8144 % values into respective token registers.
8146 % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering.
8149 % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument
8150 % value into a new token list register \toks#N
8151 \expandafter\putargsintokens@
\saveparamlist@,;,
%
8152 % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their
8153 % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they
8154 % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef .
8155 \edef\@tempc
{\csname mac.
\macroname .body
\endcsname}%
8156 % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers
8157 % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after
8161 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa
\expandafter{\@tempc
}%
8164 % Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group.
8166 \def\macargexpandinbody@
{%
8170 % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result
8173 % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value
8175 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb
\csname mac.
\macroname .recurse
\endcsname
8176 % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing
8183 % And now we do the real job:
8184 \edef\@tempd
{\noexpand\@tempb
{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa
}\@tempc
}%
8188 \def\putargsintokens@
#1,
{%
8189 \if#1;
\let\next\relax
8191 \let\next\putargsintokens@
8192 % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary
8194 \toksdef\@tempb
\the\paramno
8195 % Then we place the argument value into that token list register.
8196 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa
\csname macarg.
#1\endcsname
8197 \expandafter\@tempb
\expandafter{\@tempa
}%
8198 \advance\paramno by
1\relax
8203 % Trailing missing arguments are set to empty.
8205 \def\setemptyargvalues@
{%
8206 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
8207 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
8209 \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@
\paramlist\endargs@
8210 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
8215 \def\setemptyargvaluesparser@
#1,
#2\endargs@
{%
8216 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa
\expandafter{%
8217 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.
#1\endcsname{}}%
8218 \push@\@tempa
\macargdeflist@
8222 % #1 is the element target macro
8223 % #2 is the list macro
8224 % #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value
8225 \def\pop@
#1#2#3,
#4\endargs@
{%
8229 \long\def\longpop@
#1#2#3,
#4\endargs@
{%
8235 %%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of code for > 10 arguments %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
8239 % Remove following spaces at the expansion stage.
8240 % This works because spaces are discarded before each argument when TeX is
8241 % getting the arguments for a macro.
8242 % This must not be immediately followed by a }.
8243 \long\def\gobblespaces#1{#1}
8245 % This defines a Texinfo @macro or @rmacro, called by \parsemacbody.
8246 % \macrobody has the body of the macro in it, with placeholders for
8247 % its parameters, looking like "\processmacroarg{\hash 1}".
8248 % \paramno is the number of parameters
8249 % \paramlist is a TeX parameter text, e.g. "#1,#2,#3,"
8250 % There are eight cases: recursive and nonrecursive macros of zero, one,
8251 % up to nine, and many arguments.
8252 % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
8253 % they're defined in: @include reads the file inside a group.
8256 \let\hash=##
% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
8258 \def\processmacroarg{\gobblespaces}%
8259 % This removes the pair of braces around the argument. We don't
8260 % use \eatspaces, because this can cause ends of lines to be lost
8261 % when the argument to \eatspaces is read, leading to line-based
8262 % commands like "@itemize" not being read correctly.
8264 \def\processmacroarg{\xprocessmacroarg}%
8265 \let\xprocessmacroarg\relax
8267 \ifrecursive %%%%%%%%%%%%%% Recursive %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
8270 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
8271 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}%
8273 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
8275 \noexpand\braceorline
8276 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@
\endcsname}%
8277 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@
\endcsname#
#1{%
8278 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@
\endcsname{%
8279 \noexpand\gobblespaces#
#1\empty}%
8280 % The \empty is for \gobblespaces in case #1 is empty
8282 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@@
\endcsname#
#1{%
8283 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}%
8285 \ifnum\paramno<
10\relax % at most 9
8286 % See non-recursive section below for comments
8287 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
8289 \noexpand\expandafter
8290 \noexpand\macroargctxt
8291 \noexpand\expandafter
8292 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@
\endcsname}%
8293 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@
\endcsname#
#1{%
8294 \noexpand\passargtomacro
8295 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@
\endcsname{#
#1,
}}%
8296 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@
\endcsname#
#1{%
8297 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@
\endcsname #
#1}%
8298 \expandafter\expandafter
8300 \expandafter\expandafter
8301 \csname\the\macname @@@@
\endcsname\paramlist{%
8302 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}%
8304 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
8305 \noexpand\getargvals@
{\the\macname}{\argl}%
8307 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.
\the\macname .body
\endcsname\macrobody
8308 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.
\the\macname .recurse
\endcsname\gobble
8311 \else %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Non-recursive %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
8314 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
8315 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}%
8317 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
8319 \noexpand\braceorline
8320 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@
\endcsname}%
8321 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@
\endcsname#
#1{%
8322 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@
\endcsname{%
8323 \noexpand\gobblespaces#
#1\empty}%
8324 % The \empty is for \gobblespaces in case #1 is empty
8326 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@@
\endcsname#
#1{%
8328 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}%
8331 \ifnum\paramno<
10\relax
8332 % @MACNAME sets the context for reading the macro argument
8333 % @MACNAME@@ gets the argument, processes backslashes and appends a
8335 % @MACNAME@@@ removes braces surrounding the argument list.
8336 % @MACNAME@@@@ scans the macro body with arguments substituted.
8337 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
8339 \noexpand\expandafter % This \expandafter skip any spaces after the
8340 \noexpand\macroargctxt % macro before we change the catcode of space.
8341 \noexpand\expandafter
8342 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@
\endcsname}%
8343 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@
\endcsname#
#1{%
8344 \noexpand\passargtomacro
8345 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@
\endcsname{#
#1,
}}%
8346 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@
\endcsname#
#1{%
8347 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@
\endcsname #
#1}%
8348 \expandafter\expandafter
8350 \expandafter\expandafter
8351 \csname\the\macname @@@@
\endcsname\paramlist{%
8352 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}%
8354 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
8355 \noexpand\getargvals@
{\the\macname}{\argl}%
8357 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.
\the\macname .body
\endcsname\macrobody
8358 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.
\the\macname .recurse
\endcsname\norecurse
8363 \catcode `\@
\texiatcatcode\relax % end private-to-Texinfo catcodes
8365 \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.
#1}}
8368 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
8370 {\catcode`\@=
0 \catcode`\\=
13 % We need to manipulate \ so use @ as escape
8371 @catcode`@_=
11 % private names
8372 @catcode`@!=
11 % used as argument separator
8374 % \passargtomacro#1#2 -
8375 % Call #1 with a list of tokens #2, with any doubled backslashes in #2
8376 % compressed to one.
8378 % This implementation works by expansion, and not execution (so we cannot use
8379 % \def or similar). This reduces the risk of this failing in contexts where
8380 % complete expansion is done with no execution (for example, in writing out to
8381 % an auxiliary file for an index entry).
8383 % State is kept in the input stream: the argument passed to
8384 % @look_ahead, @gobble_and_check_finish and @add_segment is
8386 % THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT ! {PENDING_BS} NEXT_TOKEN (... rest of input)
8389 % THE_MACRO - name of the macro we want to call
8390 % ARG_RESULT - argument list we build to pass to that macro
8391 % PENDING_BS - either a backslash or nothing
8392 % NEXT_TOKEN - used to look ahead in the input stream to see what's coming next
8394 @gdef@passargtomacro
#1#2{%
8395 @add_segment
#1!
{}@relax
#2\@_finish\%
8397 @gdef@_finish
{@_finishx
} @global@let@_finishx@relax
8399 % #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
8402 % #4 used to look ahead
8404 % If the next token is not a backslash, process the rest of the argument;
8405 % otherwise, remove the next token.
8406 @gdef@look_ahead
#1!
#2#3#4{%
8408 @expandafter@gobble_and_check_finish
8410 @expandafter@add_segment
8414 % #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
8417 % #4 should be a backslash, which is gobbled.
8420 % Double backslash found. Add a single backslash, and look ahead.
8421 @gdef@gobble_and_check_finish
#1!
#2#3#4#5{%
8422 @add_segment
#1\!
{}#5#5%
8427 % #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
8430 % #4 is input stream until next backslash
8432 % Input stream is either at the start of the argument, or just after a
8433 % backslash sequence, either a lone backslash, or a doubled backslash.
8434 % NEXT_TOKEN contains the first token in the input stream: if it is \finish,
8435 % finish; otherwise, append to ARG_RESULT the segment of the argument up until
8436 % the next backslash. PENDING_BACKSLASH contains a backslash to represent
8437 % a backslash just before the start of the input stream that has not been
8438 % added to ARG_RESULT.
8439 @gdef@add_segment
#1!
#2#3#4\
{%
8443 % append the pending backslash to the result, followed by the next segment
8444 @expandafter@is_fi@look_ahead
#1#2#4!
{\
}@fi
8445 % this @fi is discarded by @look_ahead.
8446 % we can't get rid of it with \expandafter because we don't know how
8452 % #3 discards the res of the conditional in @add_segment, and @is_fi ends the
8454 @gdef@call_the_macro
#1#2!
#3@fi
{@is_fi
#1{#2}}
8457 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
8459 % \braceorline MAC is used for a one-argument macro MAC. It checks
8460 % whether the next non-whitespace character is a {. It sets the context
8461 % for reading the argument (slightly different in the two cases). Then,
8462 % to read the argument, in the whole-line case, it then calls the regular
8463 % \parsearg MAC; in the lbrace case, it calls \passargtomacro MAC.
8465 \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=
#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
8466 \def\braceorlinexxx{%
8469 \expandafter\passargtomacro
8471 \macrolineargctxt\expandafter\parsearg
8476 % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
8477 % sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
8479 \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
8480 \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
8481 \def\aliasyyy #1=
#2\relax{%
8483 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=
\empty
8484 \addtomacrolist{#1}%
8485 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=
\makecsname{#2}}%
8491 \message{cross references,
}
8494 \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
8495 \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
8497 % @inforef is relatively simple.
8498 \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**
}
8499 \def\inforefzzz #1,
#2,
#3,
#4**
{%
8500 \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
8501 node
\samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
8503 % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
8504 % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
8505 % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
8506 % @node foo , bar , ...
8507 % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
8509 \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,
\finishnodeparse}
8511 % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
8512 % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
8513 \def\donode#1 ,
#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,
\finishnodeparse}
8514 \def\dodonode#1,
#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
8517 \let\lastnode=
\empty
8519 % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
8520 % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
8523 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
8524 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
8525 \global\let\lastnode=
\empty
8529 % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
8531 \newcount\savesfregister
8533 \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=
\spacefactor \fi}
8534 \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=
\savesfregister \fi}
8535 \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing
}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
8537 % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
8538 % anchor), which consists of three parts:
8539 % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection,
8540 % or the anchor name.
8541 % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
8542 % empty for anchors.
8543 % 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
8545 % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
8546 % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
8547 % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
8554 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
8555 \edef\writexrdef#
#1#
#2{%
8556 \write\auxfile{@xrdef
{#1-
% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
8557 #
#1}{#
#2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
8559 \toks0 =
\expandafter{\lastsection}%
8560 \immediate \writexrdef{title
}{\the\toks0 }%
8561 \immediate \writexrdef{snt
}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
8562 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg
}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout
8567 % @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used
8568 % automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified.
8569 % This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title
8570 % variable, now it's official.
8572 \parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{%
8575 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title
\endcsname
8577 \else\ifx\temp\offword
8578 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title
\endcsname
8581 \errhelp =
\EMsimple
8582 \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `
\temp',
8588 % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
8589 % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
8590 % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
8591 % manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
8593 \def\pxref{\putwordsee{} \xrefXX}
8594 \def\xref{\putwordSee{} \xrefXX}
8597 \def\xrefXX#1{\def\xrefXXarg{#1}\futurelet\tokenafterxref\xrefXXX}
8598 \def\xrefXXX{\expandafter\xrefX\expandafter[\xrefXXarg,,,,,,,
]}
8601 \newbox\printedrefnamebox
8602 \newbox\infofilenamebox
8603 \newbox\printedmanualbox
8605 \def\xrefX[#1,
#2,
#3,
#4,
#5,
#6]{\begingroup
8608 % Get args without leading/trailing spaces.
8609 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
8610 \setbox\printedrefnamebox =
\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
8612 \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}%
8613 \setbox\infofilenamebox =
\hbox{\infofilename\unskip}%
8615 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
8616 \setbox\printedmanualbox =
\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
8618 % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in
8619 % the @xref, figure out what we want to use.
8620 \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox =
0pt
8621 % No printed node name was explicitly given.
8622 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title
\endcsname \relax
8623 % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets.
8624 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
8626 % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside
8627 % the square brackets if we have it.
8628 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox >
0pt
8629 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name.
8630 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
8633 % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values.
8634 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title
}{}}%
8636 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
8637 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
8643 % Make link in pdf output.
8647 \makevalueexpandable
8648 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
8649 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in
8650 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename.
8653 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing
8654 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored.
8655 \edef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
8656 \ifx\pdfxrefdest\empty
8657 \def\pdfxrefdest{Top
}% no empty targets
8659 \txiescapepdf\pdfxrefdest % escape PDF special chars
8663 \startlink attr
{/Border
[0 0 0]}%
8664 \ifnum\filenamelength>
0
8665 goto file
{\the\filename.pdf
} name
{\pdfxrefdest}%
8667 goto name
{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
8670 \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
8673 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
8674 % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
8677 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
8678 \csname XR
#1-title
\endcsname
8681 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
8682 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". \iffloat distinguishes them by
8683 % \Xthisreftitle being set to a magic string.
8684 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
8685 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
8686 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
8687 \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox =
0pt
8693 % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
8695 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox >
0pt
8696 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
8699 % node/anchor (non-float) references.
8701 % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert
8702 % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not
8703 % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
8704 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens,
8705 % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name
8706 % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
8708 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox >
0pt
8709 % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name.
8711 \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}%
8713 \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox >
0pt
8714 % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no
8715 % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as
8716 % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else.
8718 \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}%
8721 % Reference within this manual.
8723 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
8724 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
8725 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
8726 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
8727 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
8729 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
8730 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
8731 \setbox2 =
\hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt
}{}}%
8732 \ifdim \wd2 >
0pt
\refx{#1-snt
}\space\fi
8734 % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden.
8735 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
8737 % But we always want a comma and a space:
8740 % output the `page 3'.
8741 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg
}{}%
8742 % Add a , if xref followed by a space
8743 \if\space\noexpand\tokenafterxref ,
%
8744 \else\ifx\
\tokenafterxref ,
% @TAB
8745 \else\ifx\*
\tokenafterxref ,
% @*
8746 \else\ifx\
\tokenafterxref ,
% @SPACE
8748 \tokenafterxref ,
% @NL
8749 \else\ifx\tie\tokenafterxref ,
% @tie
8756 % Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice).
8758 % Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither
8759 % missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply
8760 % "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual.
8762 % But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the
8763 % string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in
8764 % the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less
8765 % likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g.,
8766 % in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice.
8768 % For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every
8769 % reference, since the current font is indeterminate.
8771 \def\crossmanualxref#1{%
8772 \setbox\toprefbox =
\hbox{Top
\kern7sp}%
8773 \setbox2 =
\hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}%
8774 \ifdim \wd2 >
7sp
% nonempty?
8775 \ifdim \wd2 =
\wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top?
8776 \putwordSection{} ``
\printedrefname''
\putwordin{}\space
8782 % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
8783 % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
8784 % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
8785 % one that Bob is working on :).
8787 \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
8789 % Things referred to by \setref.
8795 \putwordChapter@tie
\the\chapno
8796 \else \ifnum\subsecno=
0
8797 \putwordSection@tie
\the\chapno.
\the\secno
8798 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=
0
8799 \putwordSection@tie
\the\chapno.
\the\secno.
\the\subsecno
8801 \putwordSection@tie
\the\chapno.
\the\secno.
\the\subsecno.
\the\subsubsecno
8806 \putwordAppendix@tie @char
\the\appendixno{}%
8807 \else \ifnum\subsecno=
0
8808 \putwordSection@tie @char
\the\appendixno.
\the\secno
8809 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=
0
8810 \putwordSection@tie @char
\the\appendixno.
\the\secno.
\the\subsecno
8813 @char
\the\appendixno.
\the\secno.
\the\subsecno.
\the\subsubsecno
8817 % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
8818 % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
8825 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
8826 \csname XR
#1\endcsname
8829 % If not defined, say something at least.
8830 \angleleft un\-de\-fined
\angleright
8833 {\toks0 =
{#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value
8834 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `
\the\toks0'.
}}%
8837 \global\warnedxrefstrue
8838 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.
}%
8843 % It's defined, so just use it.
8846 #2% Output the suffix in any case.
8849 % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's
8850 % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
8851 % collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
8854 {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current
8855 % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these
8856 % mess up the control sequence name.
8859 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
8862 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR
\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref
8864 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
8865 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR
\safexrefname\endcsname
8866 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
8867 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
8868 \csname floatlist
\iffloattype\endcsname
8870 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
8871 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
8872 \toks0 =
{\do}% yes, so just \do
8874 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
8875 \toks0 =
\expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
8878 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
8879 % for later use in \listoffloats.
8880 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist
\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
8885 % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
8886 % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
8887 % This is done with @novalidate at the beginning of the file.
8889 \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
8890 \let\novalidate =
\linksfalse
8892 % Used when writing to the aux file, or when using data from it.
8893 \def\requireauxfile{%
8896 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
8897 \immediate\openout\auxfile=
\jobname.aux
8899 \global\let\requireauxfile=
\relax % Only do this once.
8902 % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
8905 \openin 1 \jobname.aux
8908 \global\havexrefstrue
8913 \def\setupdatafile{%
8914 \catcode`\^^@=
\other
8915 \catcode`\^^A=
\other
8916 \catcode`\^^B=
\other
8917 \catcode`\^^C=
\other
8918 \catcode`\^^D=
\other
8919 \catcode`\^^E=
\other
8920 \catcode`\^^F=
\other
8921 \catcode`\^^G=
\other
8922 \catcode`\^^H=
\other
8923 \catcode`\^^K=
\other
8924 \catcode`\^^L=
\other
8925 \catcode`\^^N=
\other
8926 \catcode`\^^P=
\other
8927 \catcode`\^^Q=
\other
8928 \catcode`\^^R=
\other
8929 \catcode`\^^S=
\other
8930 \catcode`\^^T=
\other
8931 \catcode`\^^U=
\other
8932 \catcode`\^^V=
\other
8933 \catcode`\^^W=
\other
8934 \catcode`\^^X=
\other
8935 \catcode`\^^Z=
\other
8936 \catcode`\^^
[=
\other
8937 \catcode`\^^\=
\other
8938 \catcode`\^^
]=
\other
8939 \catcode`\^^^=
\other
8940 \catcode`\^^_=
\other
8941 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
8942 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
8943 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
8944 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
8945 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
8946 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
8947 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
8948 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
8950 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
8951 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
8952 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
8956 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
8969 \catcode`+=
\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
8971 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
8972 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than
8973 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
8974 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
8975 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
8976 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for
8977 % now. --karl, 15jan04.
8980 % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
8981 {\setcharscatcodeothernonglobal}%
8983 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
8989 \def\readdatafile#1{%
8996 \message{insertions,
}
8997 % including footnotes.
8999 \newcount \footnoteno
9001 % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
9002 % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
9003 % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
9004 % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
9005 % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
9006 \def\supereject{\par\penalty -
20000\footnoteno =
0 }
9008 % @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only.
9009 \let\footnotestyle=
\comment
9013 % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
9015 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
9016 \edef\thisfootno{$^
{\the\footnoteno}$
}%
9018 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
9019 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
9021 \ifhmode\edef\@sf
{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
9023 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
9029 % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
9030 % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
9032 % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
9033 % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
9034 % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
9037 \insert\footins\bgroup
9039 % Nested footnotes are not supported in TeX, that would take a lot
9040 % more work. (\startsavinginserts does not suffice.)
9041 \let\footnote=
\errfootnotenest
9043 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
9044 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
9045 % So reset some parameters.
9047 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
9048 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
9049 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
9050 \floatingpenalty\@MM
9055 \parindent\defaultparindent
9059 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
9060 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
9061 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
9062 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
9063 \let\noindent =
\relax
9065 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
9066 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
9067 \everypar =
{\hang}%
9068 \textindent{\thisfootno}%
9070 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
9071 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
9072 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
9075 % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine.
9076 \futurelet\next\fo@t
9078 }%end \catcode `\@=11
9080 \def\errfootnotenest{%
9082 \errmessage{Nested footnotes not supported in texinfo.tex,
9083 even though they work in makeinfo; sorry
}
9086 \def\errfootnoteheading{%
9088 \errmessage{Footnotes in chapters, sections, etc., are not supported
}
9091 % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
9092 % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
9094 % Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
9095 % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
9096 % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
9098 % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
9099 % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
9102 \def\startsavinginserts{%
9103 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
9104 \let\insert\saveinsert
9106 \let\checkinserts\relax
9110 % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
9111 % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
9114 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
9115 \afterassignment\next
9116 % swallow the left brace
9119 \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE
\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
9120 \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 =
\vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
9122 \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
9124 \def\placesaveins#1{%
9125 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
9129 % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
9131 \def\dospecials{\do S
\do A
\do V
\do E
} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
9132 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE
{}
9136 \def\newsaveins #1{%
9137 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
9140 \def\newsaveinsX #1{%
9141 \csname newbox
\endcsname #1%
9142 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
9147 \let\checkinserts\empty
9152 % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
9153 % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
9155 % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
9156 % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
9157 % undone and the next image would fail.
9158 \openin 1 = epsf.tex
9160 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
9161 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
9162 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 =
}%
9167 % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
9168 \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
9169 \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
9170 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
9171 it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.
}
9174 \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined
9175 \ifwarnednoepsf \else
9176 \errhelp =
\noepsfhelp
9177 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored
}%
9178 \global\warnednoepsftrue
9181 \imagexxx #1,,,,,
\finish
9185 % Arguments to @image:
9186 % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
9187 % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
9188 % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
9189 % #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
9190 % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff.
9192 \def\imagexxx#1,
#2,
#3,
#4,
#5,
#6\finish{\begingroup
9193 \catcode`\^^M =
5 % in case we're inside an example
9194 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
9195 \def\xprocessmacroarg{\eatspaces}% in case we are being used via a macro
9196 % If the image is by itself, center it.
9199 \else \ifx\centersub\centerV
9200 % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space
9202 \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev
9207 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
9208 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
9210 \nobreak\vskip\parskip
9214 % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
9215 % environment such as @quotation is respected.
9216 % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the
9217 % normal paragraph indentation.
9218 % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't
9219 % want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and
9220 % eradicate the centering.
9221 \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi
9225 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX <= 0.80
9226 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
9228 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
9230 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
9231 \setbox0 =
\hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
9232 \ifdim\wd0 >
0pt
\epsfxsize=
#2\relax \fi
9233 \setbox0 =
\hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
9234 \ifdim\wd0 >
0pt
\epsfysize=
#3\relax \fi
9238 \doxeteximage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
9243 \medskip % space after a standalone image
9245 \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi
9249 % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
9250 % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
9251 % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
9253 \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,
\finish}
9255 % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
9256 \def\eatcommaspace#1,
{#1,
}
9258 % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
9259 % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
9260 % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
9262 % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
9265 % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
9266 % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
9268 % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
9269 % chapter-level command.
9270 \let\resetallfloatnos=
\empty
9272 \def\dofloat#1,
#2,
#3,
#4\finish{%
9273 \let\thiscaption=
\empty
9274 \let\thisshortcaption=
\empty
9276 % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
9278 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
9279 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
9283 % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
9288 \def\floatlabel{#2}%
9289 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
9291 \ifx\floattype\empty
9292 \let\safefloattype=
\empty
9295 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
9296 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
9299 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
9303 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
9304 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
9305 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
9306 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
9308 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno
\endcsname
9309 \global\advance\floatno by
1
9312 % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the
9313 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
9314 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
9315 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
9318 \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=
\safefloattype}%
9319 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat
}%
9323 % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
9326 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
9327 \restorefirstparagraphindent
9330 % we have these possibilities:
9331 % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
9332 % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
9333 % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
9334 % @float Foo & no caption: Foo
9335 % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
9336 % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
9337 % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
9338 % @float & no caption:
9341 \let\floatident =
\empty
9343 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
9344 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
9346 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
9347 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
9348 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
9349 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
9352 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
9355 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
9356 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
9357 \let\captionline =
\floatident
9359 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
9360 \ifx\floatident\empty \else
9361 \appendtomacro\captionline{:
}% had ident, so need a colon between
9365 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
9368 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
9369 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
9370 \ifx\captionline\empty \else
9374 % Space below caption.
9378 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
9379 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
9380 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
9381 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
9382 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
9383 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
9388 % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
9389 % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
9390 % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
9392 \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
9393 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
9400 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef
{\floatlabel-lof
}{\floatident
9401 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else :
\gtemp \fi}}%
9404 \egroup % end of \vtop
9406 % place the captured inserts
9408 % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
9409 % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
9410 % float. --kasal, 26may04
9415 % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
9417 \def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
9418 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
9421 % @caption, @shortcaption
9423 \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
9424 \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
9425 \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
9426 \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
9428 % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
9429 % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
9432 % Haven't seen this figure type before.
9433 \csname newcount
\endcsname #1%
9435 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
9436 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
9437 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=
0 }%
9442 % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
9443 % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
9444 % first read the @float command.
9446 \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie
\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
9448 % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
9449 % distinguish floats from other xref types.
9450 \def\floatmagic{!!float!!
}
9452 % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
9453 % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
9454 % \lastsection value which we \setref above.
9456 \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==
\finish}
9458 % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
9459 % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
9461 \def\doiffloat#1=
#2=
#3\finish{%
9463 \def\iffloattype{#2}%
9464 \ifx\temp\floatmagic
9467 % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
9469 \parseargdef\listoffloats{%
9470 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
9472 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
9473 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
9476 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
9479 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
9480 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist
\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
9482 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
9483 \message{\linenumber No `
\safefloattype' floats to list.
}%
9487 \leftskip=
\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
9488 \let\do=
\listoffloatsdo
9489 \csname floatlist
\safefloattype\endcsname
9494 % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
9495 % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
9496 % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
9497 % has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
9499 % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
9500 % they won't appear in the aux file).
9502 \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
9503 \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title
\finish{{%
9504 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
9505 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
9506 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
9508 \toksA =
\expandafter{\csname XR
#1-lof
\endcsname}%
9510 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
9511 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR
#1-pg
\endcsname}}%
9516 \message{localization,
}
9518 % For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
9519 % early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language
9520 % (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
9523 \catcode`
\_ =
\active
9525 \parseargdef\documentlanguage{%
9526 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
9527 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
9528 \let_ =
\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filename test
9529 \openin 1 txi-
#1.tex
9531 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore #1_
\finish
9533 \globaldefs =
1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
9537 \endgroup % end raw TeX
9540 % If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
9543 \gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_
#2\finish{%
9544 \openin 1 txi-
#1.tex
9546 \errhelp =
\nolanghelp
9547 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-
#1.tex
}%
9549 \globaldefs =
1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
9554 }% end of special _ catcode
9556 \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
9557 is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current
9558 directory should work if nowhere else does.
}
9560 % This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
9561 % \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
9562 % third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
9564 % The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
9565 % See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
9566 % /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
9568 % With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
9569 % available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in
9570 % Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the
9571 % accented characters problem.)
9574 \def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
9575 % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
9576 \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@
#1\endcsname \relax
9577 \message{no patterns for
#1}%
9579 \global\language =
\csname lang@
#1\endcsname
9581 % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
9582 \global\lefthyphenmin =
#2\relax
9583 \global\righthyphenmin =
#3\relax
9586 % XeTeX and LuaTeX can handle native Unicode.
9587 % Their default I/O is UTF-8 sequence instead of byte-wise.
9588 % Other TeX engine (pdfTeX etc.) I/O is byte-wise.
9590 \newif\iftxinativeunicodecapable
9591 \newif\iftxiusebytewiseio
9593 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
9594 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
9595 \txinativeunicodecapablefalse
9596 \txiusebytewiseiotrue
9598 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue
9599 \txiusebytewiseiofalse
9602 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue
9603 \txiusebytewiseiofalse
9606 % Set I/O by bytes instead of UTF-8 sequence for XeTeX and LuaTex
9607 % for non-UTF-8 (byte-wise) encodings.
9609 \def\setbytewiseio{%
9610 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
9612 \XeTeXdefaultencoding "bytes"
% For subsequent files to be read
9613 \XeTeXinputencoding "bytes"
% For document root file
9614 % Unfortunately, there seems to be no corresponding XeTeX command for
9615 % output encoding. This is a problem for auxiliary index and TOC files.
9616 % The only solution would be perhaps to write out @U{...} sequences in
9617 % place of non-ASCII characters.
9620 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
9623 local utf8_char
, byte
, gsub = unicode
.utf8
.char
, string.byte
, string.gsub
9624 local function convert_char (char
)
9625 return utf8_char(byte(char
))
9628 local function convert_line (line
)
9629 return gsub(line
, ".", convert_char
)
9632 callback
.register("process_input_buffer", convert_line
)
9634 local function convert_line_out (line
)
9636 for c
in string.utfvalues(line
) do
9637 line_out
= line_out
.. string.char(c
)
9642 callback
.register("process_output_buffer", convert_line_out
)
9646 \txiusebytewiseiotrue
9650 % Helpers for encodings.
9651 % Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
9653 \def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
9655 \loop\ifnum\count255<
256
9656 \global\catcode\count255=
#1\relax
9657 \advance\count255 by
1
9661 \def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
9663 \loop\ifnum\count255<
256
9664 \catcode\count255=
#1\relax
9665 \advance\count255 by
1
9669 % @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
9670 % according to the specified encoding.
9672 \def\documentencoding{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\documentencodingzzz}
9673 \def\documentencodingzzz#1{%
9675 % Encoding being declared for the document.
9676 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc
\endcsname}%
9678 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
9679 % to compare them with \ifx.
9680 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc
\endcsname}%
9681 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-
8859-
15.enc
\endcsname}%
9682 \def\latone{\csname ISO-
8859-
1.enc
\endcsname}%
9683 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-
8859-
2.enc
\endcsname}%
9684 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-
8.enc
\endcsname}%
9686 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
9689 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
9690 \iftxinativeunicodecapable
9693 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
9696 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
9697 \iftxinativeunicodecapable
9700 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
9703 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
9704 \iftxinativeunicodecapable
9707 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
9710 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
9711 \iftxinativeunicodecapable
9712 % For native Unicode (XeTeX and LuaTeX)
9713 \nativeunicodechardefs
9715 % For UTF-8 byte sequence (TeX, eTeX and pdfTeX)
9716 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
9717 % since we already invoked \utfeightchardefs at the top level
9718 % (below), do not re-invoke it, then our check for duplicated
9719 % definitions triggers. Making non-ascii chars active is enough.
9723 \message{Ignoring unknown
document encoding:
#1.
}%
9733 % A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
9734 % the default font encoding (OT1).
9736 \def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing, sorry:
#1.
}}
9738 % Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
9739 \def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,
{#1}\fi}
9741 % First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
9742 % correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
9743 % macros containing the character definitions.
9744 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
9746 % Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
9747 \def\latonechardefs{%
9749 \gdef^^a1
{\exclamdown}
9750 \gdef^^a2
{{\tcfont \char162}} % cent
9752 \gdef^^a4
{{\tcfont \char164}} % currency
9753 \gdef^^a5
{{\tcfont \char165}} % yen
9754 \gdef^^a6
{{\tcfont \char166}} % broken bar
9757 \gdef^^a9
{\copyright}
9759 \gdef^^ab
{\guillemetleft}
9760 \gdef^^ac
{\ensuremath\lnot}
9762 \gdef^^ae
{\registeredsymbol}
9765 \gdef^^b0
{\textdegree}
9772 \gdef^^b7
{\ensuremath\cdot}
9773 \gdef^^b8
{\cedilla\
}
9776 \gdef^^bb
{\guillemetright}
9777 \gdef^^bc
{$
1\over4$
}
9778 \gdef^^bd
{$
1\over2$
}
9779 \gdef^^be
{$
3\over4$
}
9780 \gdef^^bf
{\questiondown}
9787 \gdef^^c5
{\ringaccent A
}
9789 \gdef^^c7
{\cedilla C
}
9821 \gdef^^e5
{\ringaccent a
}
9823 \gdef^^e7
{\cedilla c
}
9828 \gdef^^ec
{\`
{\dotless i
}}
9829 \gdef^^ed
{\'
{\dotless i
}}
9830 \gdef^^ee
{\^
{\dotless i
}}
9831 \gdef^^ef
{\"
{\dotless i
}}
9851 % Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
9852 \def\latninechardefs{%
9853 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
9866 % Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
9867 \def\lattwochardefs{%
9869 \gdef^^a1
{\ogonek{A
}}
9872 \gdef^^a4
{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN
}}
9878 \gdef^^aa
{\cedilla S
}
9883 \gdef^^af
{\dotaccent Z
}
9885 \gdef^^b0
{\textdegree}
9886 \gdef^^b1
{\ogonek{a
}}
9887 \gdef^^b2
{\ogonek{ }}
9893 \gdef^^b8
{\cedilla\
}
9895 \gdef^^ba
{\cedilla s
}
9900 \gdef^^bf
{\dotaccent z
}
9909 \gdef^^c7
{\cedilla C
}
9912 \gdef^^ca
{\ogonek{E
}}
9928 \gdef^^d9
{\ringaccent U
}
9933 \gdef^^de
{\cedilla T
}
9943 \gdef^^e7
{\cedilla c
}
9946 \gdef^^ea
{\ogonek{e
}}
9949 \gdef^^ed
{\'
{\dotless{i
}}}
9950 \gdef^^ee
{\^
{\dotless{i
}}}
9962 \gdef^^f9
{\ringaccent u
}
9967 \gdef^^fe
{\cedilla t
}
9968 \gdef^^ff
{\dotaccent{}}
9971 % UTF-8 character definitions.
9973 % This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
9974 % changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by
9975 % permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
9981 \gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
9982 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:
#1\string #2\endcsname}
9984 \gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
9985 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:
#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
9987 \gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
9988 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:
#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
9990 \gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
9992 \message{\linenumber Unicode char
\string #1 not defined for Texinfo
}%
10003 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active
10004 \uccode`\~
\countUTFx
10005 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
10006 \advance\countUTFx by
1
10007 \ifnum\countUTFx <
\countUTFy
10008 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
10014 \xdef~
{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~
}}
10020 \xdef~
{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~
}}
10026 \xdef~
{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~
}}
10030 \def\globallet{\global\let} % save some \expandafter's below
10032 % @U{xxxx} to produce U+xxxx, if we support it.
10034 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:
#1\endcsname \relax
10035 \iftxinativeunicodecapable
10036 % Any Unicode characters can be used by native Unicode.
10037 % However, if the font does not have the glyph, the letter will miss.
10039 \uccode`\.="
#1\relax
10043 \errhelp =
\EMsimple
10044 \errmessage{Unicode character U+
#1 not supported, sorry
}%
10047 \csname uni:
#1\endcsname
10051 % For UTF-8 byte sequence (TeX, e-TeX and pdfTeX)
10052 % Definition macro to replace the Unicode character
10053 % Definition macro that is used by @U command
10063 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii#1#2{%
10064 \countUTFz = "
#1\relax
10065 %\wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
10068 \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets#
#1#
#2{%
10069 \csname u8:#
#1\string #
#2\endcsname}%
10070 \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets#
#1#
#2#
#3{%
10071 \csname u8:#
#1\string #
#2\string #
#3\endcsname}%
10072 \def\UTFviiiFourOctets#
#1#
#2#
#3#
#4{%
10073 \csname u8:#
#1\string #
#2\string #
#3\string #
#4\endcsname}%
10074 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
10075 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
10076 \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
10078 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:
#1\endcsname \relax \else
10079 \message{Internal error, already defined:
#1}%
10082 % define an additional control sequence for this code point.
10083 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:
#1\endcsname \UTFviiiTmp
10086 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
10087 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0
\relax
10088 \errhelp =
\EMsimple
10089 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value <
00A0
}%
10090 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "
800\relax
10092 \parseUTFviiiB C
\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,
%
10093 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "
10000\relax
10096 \parseUTFviiiB E
\UTFviiiThreeOctets.
{,;
}%
10101 \parseUTFviiiB F
\UTFviiiFourOctets.
{!,;
}%
10105 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
10106 \countUTFx =
\countUTFz
10107 \divide\countUTFz by
64
10108 \countUTFy =
\countUTFz
10109 \multiply\countUTFz by
64
10110 \advance\countUTFx by -
\countUTFz
10111 \advance\countUTFx by
128
10112 \uccode `
#1\countUTFx
10113 \countUTFz =
\countUTFy}
10115 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
10116 \advance\countUTFz by "
#10\relax
10117 \uccode `
#3\countUTFz
10118 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
10121 % For native Unicode (XeTeX and LuaTeX)
10122 % Definition macro that is set catcode other non global
10124 \def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeOther#1#2{%
10128 % https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plane_(Unicode)#Basic_M
10129 % U+0000..U+007F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_Latin_(Unicode_block)
10130 % U+0080..U+00FF = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin-1_Supplement_(Unicode_block)
10131 % U+0100..U+017F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-A
10132 % U+0180..U+024F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-B
10134 % Many of our renditions are less than wonderful, and all the missing
10135 % characters are available somewhere. Loading the necessary fonts
10136 % awaits user request. We can't truly support Unicode without
10137 % reimplementing everything that's been done in LaTeX for many years,
10138 % plus probably using luatex or xetex, and who knows what else.
10139 % We won't be doing that here in this simple file. But we can try to at
10140 % least make most of the characters not bomb out.
10142 \def\unicodechardefs{%
10143 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0
}{\tie}%
10144 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1
}{\exclamdown}%
10145 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A2
}{{\tcfont \char162}}% 0242=cent
10146 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3
}{\pounds}%
10147 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A4
}{{\tcfont \char164}}% 0244=currency
10148 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A5
}{{\tcfont \char165}}% 0245=yen
10149 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A6
}{{\tcfont \char166}}% 0246=brokenbar
10150 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A7
}{\S}%
10151 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8
}{\"
{ }}%
10152 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9
}{\copyright}%
10153 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA
}{\ordf}%
10154 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB
}{\guillemetleft}%
10155 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AC
}{\ensuremath\lnot}%
10156 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD
}{\-
}%
10157 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE
}{\registeredsymbol}%
10158 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF
}{\=
{ }}%
10160 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0
}{\ringaccent{ }}%
10161 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B1
}{\ensuremath\pm}%
10162 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B2
}{$^
2$
}%
10163 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B3
}{$^
3$
}%
10164 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4
}{\'
{ }}%
10165 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B5
}{$
\mu$
}%
10166 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6
}{\P}%
10167 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7
}{\ensuremath\cdot}%
10168 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8
}{\cedilla{ }}%
10169 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B9
}{$^
1$
}%
10170 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA
}{\ordm}%
10171 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB
}{\guillemetright}%
10172 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BC
}{$
1\over4$
}%
10173 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BD
}{$
1\over2$
}%
10174 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BE
}{$
3\over4$
}%
10175 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF
}{\questiondown}%
10177 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0
}{\`A
}%
10178 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1
}{\'A
}%
10179 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2
}{\^A
}%
10180 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3
}{\~A
}%
10181 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4
}{\"A
}%
10182 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5
}{\AA}%
10183 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6
}{\AE}%
10184 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7
}{\cedilla{C
}}%
10185 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8
}{\`E
}%
10186 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9
}{\'E
}%
10187 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA
}{\^E
}%
10188 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB
}{\"E
}%
10189 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC
}{\`I
}%
10190 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD
}{\'I
}%
10191 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE
}{\^I
}%
10192 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF
}{\"I
}%
10194 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0
}{\DH}%
10195 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1
}{\~N
}%
10196 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2
}{\`O
}%
10197 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3
}{\'O
}%
10198 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4
}{\^O
}%
10199 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5
}{\~O
}%
10200 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6
}{\"O
}%
10201 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D7
}{\ensuremath\times}%
10202 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8
}{\O}%
10203 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9
}{\`U
}%
10204 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA
}{\'U
}%
10205 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB
}{\^U
}%
10206 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC
}{\"U
}%
10207 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD
}{\'Y
}%
10208 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE
}{\TH}%
10209 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF
}{\ss}%
10211 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0
}{\`a
}%
10212 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1
}{\'a
}%
10213 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2
}{\^a
}%
10214 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3
}{\~a
}%
10215 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4
}{\"a
}%
10216 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5
}{\aa}%
10217 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6
}{\ae}%
10218 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7
}{\cedilla{c
}}%
10219 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8
}{\`e
}%
10220 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9
}{\'e
}%
10221 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA
}{\^e
}%
10222 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB
}{\"e
}%
10223 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC
}{\`
{\dotless{i
}}}%
10224 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED
}{\'
{\dotless{i
}}}%
10225 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE
}{\^
{\dotless{i
}}}%
10226 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF
}{\"
{\dotless{i
}}}%
10228 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0
}{\dh}%
10229 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1
}{\~n
}%
10230 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2
}{\`o
}%
10231 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3
}{\'o
}%
10232 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4
}{\^o
}%
10233 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5
}{\~o
}%
10234 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6
}{\"o
}%
10235 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F7
}{\ensuremath\div}%
10236 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8
}{\o}%
10237 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9
}{\`u
}%
10238 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA
}{\'u
}%
10239 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB
}{\^u
}%
10240 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC
}{\"u
}%
10241 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD
}{\'y
}%
10242 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE
}{\th}%
10243 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF
}{\"y
}%
10245 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A
}%
10246 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a
}%
10247 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A
}}%
10248 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a
}}%
10249 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A
}}%
10250 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a
}}%
10251 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C
}%
10252 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c
}%
10253 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C
}%
10254 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c
}%
10255 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A
}{\dotaccent{C
}}%
10256 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B
}{\dotaccent{c
}}%
10257 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C
}{\v{C
}}%
10258 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D
}{\v{c
}}%
10259 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E
}{\v{D
}}%
10260 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010F
}{d'
}%
10262 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0110}{\DH}%
10263 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0111}{\dh}%
10264 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E
}%
10265 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e
}%
10266 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E
}}%
10267 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e
}}%
10268 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E
}}%
10269 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e
}}%
10270 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E
}}%
10271 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e
}}%
10272 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A
}{\v{E
}}%
10273 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B
}{\v{e
}}%
10274 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C
}{\^G
}%
10275 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D
}{\^g
}%
10276 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E
}{\u{G
}}%
10277 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F
}{\u{g
}}%
10279 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G
}}%
10280 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g
}}%
10281 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0122}{\cedilla{G
}}%
10282 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0123}{\cedilla{g
}}%
10283 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H
}%
10284 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h
}%
10285 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0126}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE
}}%
10286 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0127}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE
}}%
10287 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I
}%
10288 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~
{\dotless{i
}}}%
10289 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A
}{\=I
}%
10290 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B
}{\=
{\dotless{i
}}}%
10291 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C
}{\u{I
}}%
10292 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D
}{\u{\dotless{i
}}}%
10293 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012E
}{\ogonek{I
}}%
10294 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012F
}{\ogonek{i
}}%
10296 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I
}}%
10297 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i
}}%
10298 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ
}%
10299 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij
}%
10300 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J
}%
10301 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^
{\dotless{j
}}}%
10302 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0136}{\cedilla{K
}}%
10303 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0137}{\cedilla{k
}}%
10304 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0138}{\ensuremath\kappa}%
10305 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L
}%
10306 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A
}{\'l
}%
10307 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013B
}{\cedilla{L
}}%
10308 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013C
}{\cedilla{l
}}%
10309 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013D
}{L'
}% should kern
10310 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013E
}{l'
}% should kern
10311 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013F
}{L
\U{00B7
}}%
10313 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0140}{l
\U{00B7
}}%
10314 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}%
10315 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}%
10316 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N
}%
10317 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n
}%
10318 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0145}{\cedilla{N
}}%
10319 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0146}{\cedilla{n
}}%
10320 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N
}}%
10321 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n
}}%
10322 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0149}{'n
}%
10323 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014A
}{\missingcharmsg{ENG
}}%
10324 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014B
}{\missingcharmsg{eng
}}%
10325 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C
}{\=O
}%
10326 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D
}{\=o
}%
10327 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E
}{\u{O
}}%
10328 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F
}{\u{o
}}%
10330 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O
}}%
10331 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o
}}%
10332 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}%
10333 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}%
10334 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R
}%
10335 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r
}%
10336 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0156}{\cedilla{R
}}%
10337 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0157}{\cedilla{r
}}%
10338 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R
}}%
10339 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r
}}%
10340 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A
}{\'S
}%
10341 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B
}{\'s
}%
10342 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C
}{\^S
}%
10343 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D
}{\^s
}%
10344 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E
}{\cedilla{S
}}%
10345 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F
}{\cedilla{s
}}%
10347 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S
}}%
10348 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s
}}%
10349 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{T
}}%
10350 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{t
}}%
10351 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T
}}%
10352 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0165}{\v{t
}}%
10353 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0166}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE
}}%
10354 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0167}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE
}}%
10355 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U
}%
10356 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u
}%
10357 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A
}{\=U
}%
10358 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B
}{\=u
}%
10359 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C
}{\u{U
}}%
10360 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D
}{\u{u
}}%
10361 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E
}{\ringaccent{U
}}%
10362 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F
}{\ringaccent{u
}}%
10364 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U
}}%
10365 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u
}}%
10366 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0172}{\ogonek{U
}}%
10367 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0173}{\ogonek{u
}}%
10368 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W
}%
10369 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w
}%
10370 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y
}%
10371 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y
}%
10372 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y
}%
10373 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z
}%
10374 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A
}{\'z
}%
10375 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B
}{\dotaccent{Z
}}%
10376 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C
}{\dotaccent{z
}}%
10377 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D
}{\v{Z
}}%
10378 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E
}{\v{z
}}%
10379 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017F
}{\missingcharmsg{LONG S
}}%
10381 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4
}{D
\v{Z
}}%
10382 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5
}{D
\v{z
}}%
10383 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6
}{d
\v{z
}}%
10384 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7
}{LJ
}%
10385 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8
}{Lj
}%
10386 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9
}{lj
}%
10387 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA
}{NJ
}%
10388 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB
}{Nj
}%
10389 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC
}{nj
}%
10390 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD
}{\v{A
}}%
10391 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE
}{\v{a
}}%
10392 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF
}{\v{I
}}%
10394 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0
}{\v{\dotless{i
}}}%
10395 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1
}{\v{O
}}%
10396 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2
}{\v{o
}}%
10397 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3
}{\v{U
}}%
10398 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4
}{\v{u
}}%
10400 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2
}{\=
{\AE}}%
10401 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3
}{\=
{\ae}}%
10402 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6
}{\v{G
}}%
10403 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7
}{\v{g
}}%
10404 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8
}{\v{K
}}%
10405 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9
}{\v{k
}}%
10407 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0
}{\v{\dotless{j
}}}%
10408 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1
}{DZ
}%
10409 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2
}{Dz
}%
10410 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3
}{dz
}%
10411 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4
}{\'G
}%
10412 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5
}{\'g
}%
10413 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8
}{\`N
}%
10414 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9
}{\`n
}%
10415 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC
}{\'
{\AE}}%
10416 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD
}{\'
{\ae}}%
10417 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE
}{\'
{\O}}%
10418 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF
}{\'
{\o}}%
10420 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E
}{\v{H
}}%
10421 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F
}{\v{h
}}%
10423 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A
}}%
10424 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a
}}%
10425 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E
}}%
10426 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e
}}%
10427 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E
}{\dotaccent{O
}}%
10428 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F
}{\dotaccent{o
}}%
10430 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y
}%
10431 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y
}%
10432 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j
}}%
10434 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB
}{\ogonek{ }}%
10436 % Greek letters upper case
10437 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0391}{{\it A
}}%
10438 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0392}{{\it B
}}%
10439 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0393}{\ensuremath{\mit\Gamma}}%
10440 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0394}{\ensuremath{\mit\Delta}}%
10441 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0395}{{\it E
}}%
10442 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0396}{{\it Z
}}%
10443 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0397}{{\it H
}}%
10444 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0398}{\ensuremath{\mit\Theta}}%
10445 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0399}{{\it I
}}%
10446 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039A
}{{\it K
}}%
10447 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039B
}{\ensuremath{\mit\Lambda}}%
10448 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039C
}{{\it M
}}%
10449 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039D
}{{\it N
}}%
10450 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039E
}{\ensuremath{\mit\Xi}}%
10451 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039F
}{{\it O
}}%
10452 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A0
}{\ensuremath{\mit\Pi}}%
10453 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A1
}{{\it P
}}%
10454 %\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A2}{} % none - corresponds to final sigma
10455 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A3
}{\ensuremath{\mit\Sigma}}%
10456 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A4
}{{\it T
}}%
10457 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A5
}{\ensuremath{\mit\Upsilon}}%
10458 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A6
}{\ensuremath{\mit\Phi}}%
10459 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A7
}{{\it X
}}%
10460 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A8
}{\ensuremath{\mit\Psi}}%
10461 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A9
}{\ensuremath{\mit\Omega}}%
10463 % Vowels with accents
10464 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0390}{\ensuremath{\ddot{\acute\iota}}}%
10465 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AC
}{\ensuremath{\acute\alpha}}%
10466 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AD
}{\ensuremath{\acute\epsilon}}%
10467 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AE
}{\ensuremath{\acute\eta}}%
10468 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AF
}{\ensuremath{\acute\iota}}%
10469 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B0
}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ddot\upsilon}}}%
10471 % Standalone accent
10472 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0384}{\ensuremath{\acute{\
}}}%
10474 % Greek letters lower case
10475 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B1
}{\ensuremath\alpha}%
10476 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B2
}{\ensuremath\beta}%
10477 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B3
}{\ensuremath\gamma}%
10478 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B4
}{\ensuremath\delta}%
10479 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B5
}{\ensuremath\epsilon}%
10480 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B6
}{\ensuremath\zeta}%
10481 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B7
}{\ensuremath\eta}%
10482 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B8
}{\ensuremath\theta}%
10483 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B9
}{\ensuremath\iota}%
10484 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BA
}{\ensuremath\kappa}%
10485 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BB
}{\ensuremath\lambda}%
10486 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BC
}{\ensuremath\mu}%
10487 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BD
}{\ensuremath\nu}%
10488 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BE
}{\ensuremath\xi}%
10489 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BF
}{{\it o
}}% omicron
10490 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C0
}{\ensuremath\pi}%
10491 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C1
}{\ensuremath\rho}%
10492 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C2
}{\ensuremath\varsigma}%
10493 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C3
}{\ensuremath\sigma}%
10494 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C4
}{\ensuremath\tau}%
10495 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C5
}{\ensuremath\upsilon}%
10496 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C6
}{\ensuremath\phi}%
10497 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C7
}{\ensuremath\chi}%
10498 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C8
}{\ensuremath\psi}%
10499 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C9
}{\ensuremath\omega}%
10501 % More Greek vowels with accents
10502 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CA
}{\ensuremath{\ddot\iota}}%
10503 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CB
}{\ensuremath{\ddot\upsilon}}%
10504 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CC
}{\ensuremath{\acute o
}}%
10505 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CD
}{\ensuremath{\acute\upsilon}}%
10506 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CE
}{\ensuremath{\acute\omega}}%
10508 % Variant Greek letters
10509 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D1
}{\ensuremath\vartheta}%
10510 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D6
}{\ensuremath\varpi}%
10511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03F1
}{\ensuremath\varrho}%
10513 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02
}{\dotaccent{B
}}%
10514 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03
}{\dotaccent{b
}}%
10515 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04
}{\udotaccent{B
}}%
10516 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05
}{\udotaccent{b
}}%
10517 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06
}{\ubaraccent{B
}}%
10518 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07
}{\ubaraccent{b
}}%
10519 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A
}{\dotaccent{D
}}%
10520 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B
}{\dotaccent{d
}}%
10521 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C
}{\udotaccent{D
}}%
10522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D
}{\udotaccent{d
}}%
10523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E
}{\ubaraccent{D
}}%
10524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F
}{\ubaraccent{d
}}%
10526 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E
}{\dotaccent{F
}}%
10527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F
}{\dotaccent{f
}}%
10529 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20
}{\=G
}%
10530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21
}{\=g
}%
10531 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22
}{\dotaccent{H
}}%
10532 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23
}{\dotaccent{h
}}%
10533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24
}{\udotaccent{H
}}%
10534 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25
}{\udotaccent{h
}}%
10535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26
}{\"H
}%
10536 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27
}{\"h
}%
10538 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30
}{\'K
}%
10539 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31
}{\'k
}%
10540 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32
}{\udotaccent{K
}}%
10541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33
}{\udotaccent{k
}}%
10542 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34
}{\ubaraccent{K
}}%
10543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35
}{\ubaraccent{k
}}%
10544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36
}{\udotaccent{L
}}%
10545 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37
}{\udotaccent{l
}}%
10546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A
}{\ubaraccent{L
}}%
10547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B
}{\ubaraccent{l
}}%
10548 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E
}{\'M
}%
10549 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F
}{\'m
}%
10551 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40
}{\dotaccent{M
}}%
10552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41
}{\dotaccent{m
}}%
10553 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42
}{\udotaccent{M
}}%
10554 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43
}{\udotaccent{m
}}%
10555 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44
}{\dotaccent{N
}}%
10556 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45
}{\dotaccent{n
}}%
10557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46
}{\udotaccent{N
}}%
10558 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47
}{\udotaccent{n
}}%
10559 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48
}{\ubaraccent{N
}}%
10560 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49
}{\ubaraccent{n
}}%
10562 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54
}{\'P
}%
10563 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55
}{\'p
}%
10564 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56
}{\dotaccent{P
}}%
10565 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57
}{\dotaccent{p
}}%
10566 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58
}{\dotaccent{R
}}%
10567 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59
}{\dotaccent{r
}}%
10568 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A
}{\udotaccent{R
}}%
10569 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B
}{\udotaccent{r
}}%
10570 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E
}{\ubaraccent{R
}}%
10571 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F
}{\ubaraccent{r
}}%
10573 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60
}{\dotaccent{S
}}%
10574 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61
}{\dotaccent{s
}}%
10575 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62
}{\udotaccent{S
}}%
10576 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63
}{\udotaccent{s
}}%
10577 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A
}{\dotaccent{T
}}%
10578 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B
}{\dotaccent{t
}}%
10579 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C
}{\udotaccent{T
}}%
10580 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D
}{\udotaccent{t
}}%
10581 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E
}{\ubaraccent{T
}}%
10582 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F
}{\ubaraccent{t
}}%
10584 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C
}{\~V
}%
10585 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D
}{\~v
}%
10586 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E
}{\udotaccent{V
}}%
10587 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F
}{\udotaccent{v
}}%
10589 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80
}{\`W
}%
10590 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81
}{\`w
}%
10591 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82
}{\'W
}%
10592 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83
}{\'w
}%
10593 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84
}{\"W
}%
10594 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85
}{\"w
}%
10595 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86
}{\dotaccent{W
}}%
10596 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87
}{\dotaccent{w
}}%
10597 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88
}{\udotaccent{W
}}%
10598 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89
}{\udotaccent{w
}}%
10599 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A
}{\dotaccent{X
}}%
10600 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B
}{\dotaccent{x
}}%
10601 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C
}{\"X
}%
10602 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D
}{\"x
}%
10603 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E
}{\dotaccent{Y
}}%
10604 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F
}{\dotaccent{y
}}%
10606 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90
}{\^Z
}%
10607 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91
}{\^z
}%
10608 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92
}{\udotaccent{Z
}}%
10609 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93
}{\udotaccent{z
}}%
10610 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94
}{\ubaraccent{Z
}}%
10611 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95
}{\ubaraccent{z
}}%
10612 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96
}{\ubaraccent{h
}}%
10613 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97
}{\"t
}%
10614 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98
}{\ringaccent{w
}}%
10615 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99
}{\ringaccent{y
}}%
10617 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0
}{\udotaccent{A
}}%
10618 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1
}{\udotaccent{a
}}%
10620 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8
}{\udotaccent{E
}}%
10621 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9
}{\udotaccent{e
}}%
10622 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC
}{\~E
}%
10623 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD
}{\~e
}%
10625 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA
}{\udotaccent{I
}}%
10626 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB
}{\udotaccent{i
}}%
10627 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC
}{\udotaccent{O
}}%
10628 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD
}{\udotaccent{o
}}%
10630 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4
}{\udotaccent{U
}}%
10631 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5
}{\udotaccent{u
}}%
10633 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2
}{\`Y
}%
10634 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3
}{\`y
}%
10635 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4
}{\udotaccent{Y
}}%
10637 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8
}{\~Y
}%
10638 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9
}{\~y
}%
10641 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--
}%
10642 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---
}%
10643 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft}%
10644 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright}%
10645 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A
}{\quotesinglbase}%
10646 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C
}{\quotedblleft}%
10647 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D
}{\quotedblright}%
10648 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E
}{\quotedblbase}%
10649 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2020}{\ensuremath\dagger}%
10650 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2021}{\ensuremath\ddagger}%
10651 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}%
10652 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{202F
}{\thinspace}%
10653 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}%
10654 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}%
10655 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A
}{\guilsinglright}%
10657 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC
}{\euro}%
10659 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}%
10660 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2
}{\result}%
10662 % Mathematical symbols
10663 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2200}{\ensuremath\forall}%
10664 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2203}{\ensuremath\exists}%
10665 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2208}{\ensuremath\in}%
10666 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}%
10667 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\ast}%
10668 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221E
}{\ensuremath\infty}%
10669 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2225}{\ensuremath\parallel}%
10670 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2227}{\ensuremath\wedge}%
10671 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2229}{\ensuremath\cap}%
10672 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}%
10673 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2264}{\ensuremath\leq}%
10674 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2265}{\ensuremath\geq}%
10675 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2282}{\ensuremath\subset}%
10676 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2287}{\ensuremath\supseteq}%
10678 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2016}{\ensuremath\Vert}%
10679 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2032}{\ensuremath\prime}%
10680 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{210F
}{\ensuremath\hbar}%
10681 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2111}{\ensuremath\Im}%
10682 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2113}{\ensuremath\ell}%
10683 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2118}{\ensuremath\wp}%
10684 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{211C
}{\ensuremath\Re}%
10685 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2127}{\ensuremath\mho}%
10686 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2135}{\ensuremath\aleph}%
10687 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2190}{\ensuremath\leftarrow}%
10688 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2191}{\ensuremath\uparrow}%
10689 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2193}{\ensuremath\downarrow}%
10690 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2194}{\ensuremath\leftrightarrow}%
10691 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2195}{\ensuremath\updownarrow}%
10692 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2196}{\ensuremath\nwarrow}%
10693 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2197}{\ensuremath\nearrow}%
10694 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2198}{\ensuremath\searrow}%
10695 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2199}{\ensuremath\swarrow}%
10696 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A6
}{\ensuremath\mapsto}%
10697 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A9
}{\ensuremath\hookleftarrow}%
10698 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21AA
}{\ensuremath\hookrightarrow}%
10699 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BC
}{\ensuremath\leftharpoonup}%
10700 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BD
}{\ensuremath\leftharpoondown}%
10701 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BE
}{\ensuremath\upharpoonright}%
10702 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C0
}{\ensuremath\rightharpoonup}%
10703 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C1
}{\ensuremath\rightharpoondown}%
10704 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21CC
}{\ensuremath\rightleftharpoons}%
10705 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D0
}{\ensuremath\Leftarrow}%
10706 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D1
}{\ensuremath\Uparrow}%
10707 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D3
}{\ensuremath\Downarrow}%
10708 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D4
}{\ensuremath\Leftrightarrow}%
10709 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D5
}{\ensuremath\Updownarrow}%
10710 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21DD
}{\ensuremath\leadsto}%
10711 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2201}{\ensuremath\complement}%
10712 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2202}{\ensuremath\partial}%
10713 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2205}{\ensuremath\emptyset}%
10714 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2207}{\ensuremath\nabla}%
10715 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2209}{\ensuremath\notin}%
10716 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220B
}{\ensuremath\owns}%
10717 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220F
}{\ensuremath\prod}%
10718 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2210}{\ensuremath\coprod}%
10719 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2211}{\ensuremath\sum}%
10720 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2213}{\ensuremath\mp}%
10721 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2218}{\ensuremath\circ}%
10722 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221A
}{\ensuremath\surd}%
10723 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221D
}{\ensuremath\propto}%
10724 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2220}{\ensuremath\angle}%
10725 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2223}{\ensuremath\mid}%
10726 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2228}{\ensuremath\vee}%
10727 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222A
}{\ensuremath\cup}%
10728 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222B
}{\ensuremath\smallint}%
10729 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222E
}{\ensuremath\oint}%
10730 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{223C
}{\ensuremath\sim}%
10731 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2240}{\ensuremath\wr}%
10732 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2243}{\ensuremath\simeq}%
10733 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2245}{\ensuremath\cong}%
10734 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2248}{\ensuremath\approx}%
10735 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{224D
}{\ensuremath\asymp}%
10736 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2250}{\ensuremath\doteq}%
10737 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2260}{\ensuremath\neq}%
10738 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226A
}{\ensuremath\ll}%
10739 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226B
}{\ensuremath\gg}%
10740 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227A
}{\ensuremath\prec}%
10741 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227B
}{\ensuremath\succ}%
10742 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2283}{\ensuremath\supset}%
10743 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2286}{\ensuremath\subseteq}%
10744 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228E
}{\ensuremath\uplus}%
10745 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228F
}{\ensuremath\sqsubset}%
10746 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2290}{\ensuremath\sqsupset}%
10747 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2291}{\ensuremath\sqsubseteq}%
10748 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2292}{\ensuremath\sqsupseteq}%
10749 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2293}{\ensuremath\sqcap}%
10750 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2294}{\ensuremath\sqcup}%
10751 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2295}{\ensuremath\oplus}%
10752 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2296}{\ensuremath\ominus}%
10753 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2297}{\ensuremath\otimes}%
10754 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2298}{\ensuremath\oslash}%
10755 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2299}{\ensuremath\odot}%
10756 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A2
}{\ensuremath\vdash}%
10757 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A3
}{\ensuremath\dashv}%
10758 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A4
}{\ensuremath\ptextop}%
10759 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A5
}{\ensuremath\bot}%
10760 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A8
}{\ensuremath\models}%
10761 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22B4
}{\ensuremath\unlhd}%
10762 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22B5
}{\ensuremath\unrhd}%
10763 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C0
}{\ensuremath\bigwedge}%
10764 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C1
}{\ensuremath\bigvee}%
10765 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C2
}{\ensuremath\bigcap}%
10766 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C3
}{\ensuremath\bigcup}%
10767 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C4
}{\ensuremath\diamond}%
10768 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C5
}{\ensuremath\cdot}%
10769 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C6
}{\ensuremath\star}%
10770 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C8
}{\ensuremath\bowtie}%
10771 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2308}{\ensuremath\lceil}%
10772 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2309}{\ensuremath\rceil}%
10773 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230A
}{\ensuremath\lfloor}%
10774 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230B
}{\ensuremath\rfloor}%
10775 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2322}{\ensuremath\frown}%
10776 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2323}{\ensuremath\smile}%
10778 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25A1
}{\ensuremath\Box}%
10779 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B3
}{\ensuremath\triangle}%
10780 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B7
}{\ensuremath\triangleright}%
10781 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25BD
}{\ensuremath\bigtriangledown}%
10782 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C1
}{\ensuremath\triangleleft}%
10783 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C7
}{\ensuremath\Diamond}%
10784 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2660}{\ensuremath\spadesuit}%
10785 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2661}{\ensuremath\heartsuit}%
10786 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2662}{\ensuremath\diamondsuit}%
10787 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2663}{\ensuremath\clubsuit}%
10788 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266D
}{\ensuremath\flat}%
10789 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266E
}{\ensuremath\natural}%
10790 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266F
}{\ensuremath\sharp}%
10791 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{26AA
}{\ensuremath\bigcirc}%
10792 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27B9
}{\ensuremath\rangle}%
10793 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27C2
}{\ensuremath\perp}%
10794 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27E8
}{\ensuremath\langle}%
10795 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F5
}{\ensuremath\longleftarrow}%
10796 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F6
}{\ensuremath\longrightarrow}%
10797 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F7
}{\ensuremath\longleftrightarrow}%
10798 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27FC
}{\ensuremath\longmapsto}%
10799 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{29F5
}{\ensuremath\setminus}%
10800 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A00
}{\ensuremath\bigodot}%
10801 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A01
}{\ensuremath\bigoplus}%
10802 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A02
}{\ensuremath\bigotimes}%
10803 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A04
}{\ensuremath\biguplus}%
10804 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A06
}{\ensuremath\bigsqcup}%
10805 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A1D
}{\ensuremath\Join}%
10806 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A3F
}{\ensuremath\amalg}%
10807 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AAF
}{\ensuremath\preceq}%
10808 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AB0
}{\ensuremath\succeq}%
10810 \global\mathchardef\checkmark="
1370% actually the square root sign
10811 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2713}{\ensuremath\checkmark}%
10812 }% end of \unicodechardefs
10814 % UTF-8 byte sequence (pdfTeX) definitions (replacing and @U command)
10815 % It makes the setting that replace UTF-8 byte sequence.
10816 \def\utfeightchardefs{%
10817 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii
10821 \newif\ifpassthroughchars
10822 \passthroughcharsfalse
10824 % For native Unicode (XeTeX and LuaTeX)
10825 % Definition macro to replace / pass-through the Unicode character
10827 \def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative#1#2{%
10828 \catcode"
#1=
\active
10829 \def\dodeclareunicodecharacternative#
#1#
#2#
#3{%
10831 \uccode`\~="#
#2\relax
10832 \uppercase{\gdef~
}{%
10833 \ifpassthroughchars
10842 \uccode`\.="
#1\relax
10843 \uppercase{\def\UTFNativeTmp{.
}}%
10844 \expandafter\dodeclareunicodecharacternative\UTFNativeTmp{#1}{#2}%
10848 % Native Unicode (XeTeX and LuaTeX) character replacing definitions
10849 % It makes the setting that replace the Unicode characters.
10850 \def\nativeunicodechardefs{%
10851 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative
10855 % For native Unicode (XeTeX and LuaTeX). Make the character token expand
10856 % to the sequences given in \unicodechardefs for printing.
10857 \def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU#1#2{%
10859 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:
#1\endcsname \UTFAtUTmp
10862 % Native Unicode (XeTeX and LuaTeX) @U command definitions
10863 \def\nativeunicodechardefsatu{%
10864 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU
10868 % Native Unicode (XeTeX and LuaTeX) catcode other non global definitions
10869 \def\nativeunicodecharscatcodeothernonglobal{%
10870 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeOther
10874 % Catcode (non-ASCII or native Unicode) are set to \other (non-global
10876 \def\setcharscatcodeothernonglobal{%
10877 \iftxiusebytewiseio
10878 \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other
10880 \nativeunicodecharscatcodeothernonglobal
10884 % US-ASCII character definitions.
10885 \def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
10889 % Redefine the active definitions of non-ASCII characters to expand to
10890 % non-active tokens with the same character code.
10891 \def\nonasciistringdefs{%
10892 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
10893 \def\defstringchar#
#1{\def#
#1{\string#
#1}}%
10895 \defstringchar^^
80\defstringchar^^
81\defstringchar^^
82\defstringchar^^
83%
10896 \defstringchar^^
84\defstringchar^^
85\defstringchar^^
86\defstringchar^^
87%
10897 \defstringchar^^
88\defstringchar^^
89\defstringchar^^
8a
\defstringchar^^
8b
%
10898 \defstringchar^^
8c
\defstringchar^^
8d
\defstringchar^^
8e
\defstringchar^^
8f
%
10900 \defstringchar^^
90\defstringchar^^
91\defstringchar^^
92\defstringchar^^
93%
10901 \defstringchar^^
94\defstringchar^^
95\defstringchar^^
96\defstringchar^^
97%
10902 \defstringchar^^
98\defstringchar^^
99\defstringchar^^
9a
\defstringchar^^
9b
%
10903 \defstringchar^^
9c
\defstringchar^^
9d
\defstringchar^^
9e
\defstringchar^^
9f
%
10905 \defstringchar^^a0
\defstringchar^^a1
\defstringchar^^a2
\defstringchar^^a3
%
10906 \defstringchar^^a4
\defstringchar^^a5
\defstringchar^^a6
\defstringchar^^a7
%
10907 \defstringchar^^a8
\defstringchar^^a9
\defstringchar^^aa
\defstringchar^^ab
%
10908 \defstringchar^^ac
\defstringchar^^ad
\defstringchar^^ae
\defstringchar^^af
%
10910 \defstringchar^^b0
\defstringchar^^b1
\defstringchar^^b2
\defstringchar^^b3
%
10911 \defstringchar^^b4
\defstringchar^^b5
\defstringchar^^b6
\defstringchar^^b7
%
10912 \defstringchar^^b8
\defstringchar^^b9
\defstringchar^^ba
\defstringchar^^bb
%
10913 \defstringchar^^bc
\defstringchar^^bd
\defstringchar^^be
\defstringchar^^bf
%
10915 \defstringchar^^c0
\defstringchar^^c1
\defstringchar^^c2
\defstringchar^^c3
%
10916 \defstringchar^^c4
\defstringchar^^c5
\defstringchar^^c6
\defstringchar^^c7
%
10917 \defstringchar^^c8
\defstringchar^^c9
\defstringchar^^ca
\defstringchar^^cb
%
10918 \defstringchar^^cc
\defstringchar^^cd
\defstringchar^^ce
\defstringchar^^cf
%
10920 \defstringchar^^d0
\defstringchar^^d1
\defstringchar^^d2
\defstringchar^^d3
%
10921 \defstringchar^^d4
\defstringchar^^d5
\defstringchar^^d6
\defstringchar^^d7
%
10922 \defstringchar^^d8
\defstringchar^^d9
\defstringchar^^da
\defstringchar^^db
%
10923 \defstringchar^^dc
\defstringchar^^dd
\defstringchar^^de
\defstringchar^^df
%
10925 \defstringchar^^e0
\defstringchar^^e1
\defstringchar^^e2
\defstringchar^^e3
%
10926 \defstringchar^^e4
\defstringchar^^e5
\defstringchar^^e6
\defstringchar^^e7
%
10927 \defstringchar^^e8
\defstringchar^^e9
\defstringchar^^ea
\defstringchar^^eb
%
10928 \defstringchar^^ec
\defstringchar^^ed
\defstringchar^^ee
\defstringchar^^ef
%
10930 \defstringchar^^f0
\defstringchar^^f1
\defstringchar^^f2
\defstringchar^^f3
%
10931 \defstringchar^^f4
\defstringchar^^f5
\defstringchar^^f6
\defstringchar^^f7
%
10932 \defstringchar^^f8
\defstringchar^^f9
\defstringchar^^fa
\defstringchar^^fb
%
10933 \defstringchar^^fc
\defstringchar^^fd
\defstringchar^^fe
\defstringchar^^ff
%
10936 % Write characters literally, instead of using active definitions for
10937 % printing the correct glyphs.
10938 \def\passthroughcharacters{%
10939 \iftxiusebytewiseio
10940 \nonasciistringdefs
10942 \passthroughcharstrue
10947 % define all the unicode characters we know about, for the sake of @U.
10948 \iftxinativeunicodecapable
10949 \nativeunicodechardefsatu
10955 % Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
10956 % existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
10957 % document encoding.
10959 \setnonasciicharscatcode \other
10962 \message{formatting,
}
10964 \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent =
15pt
10966 \chapheadingskip =
15pt plus
4pt minus
2pt
10967 \secheadingskip =
12pt plus
3pt minus
2pt
10968 \subsecheadingskip =
9pt plus
2pt minus
2pt
10970 % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
10973 % Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
10976 % Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
10977 \widowpenalty=
10000
10980 % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
10981 % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
10982 % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
10983 % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
10985 \def\setemergencystretch{%
10986 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
10987 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
10988 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
10990 \emergencystretch =
.15\hsize
10994 % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
10995 % 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
10996 % 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
10998 % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
10999 % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
11001 \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
11002 \voffset =
#3\relax
11003 \topskip =
#6\relax
11004 \splittopskip =
\topskip
11007 \advance\vsize by
\topskip
11008 \outervsize =
\vsize
11009 \advance\outervsize by
2\topandbottommargin
11010 \pageheight =
\vsize
11013 \outerhsize =
\hsize
11014 \advance\outerhsize by
0.5in
11015 \pagewidth =
\hsize
11017 \normaloffset =
#4\relax
11018 \bindingoffset =
#5\relax
11021 \pdfpageheight #7\relax
11022 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
11023 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
11024 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
11025 \pdfhorigin =
1 true in
11026 \pdfvorigin =
1 true in
11029 \setleading{\textleading}
11031 \parindent =
\defaultparindent
11032 \setemergencystretch
11035 % @letterpaper (the default).
11036 \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs =
1
11037 \parskip =
3pt plus
2pt minus
1pt
11038 \textleading =
13.2pt
11040 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
11041 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt
}{6in
}% that's 46 lines
11043 {\bindingoffset}{36pt
}%
11047 % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
11048 \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs =
1
11049 \parskip =
2pt plus
1pt
11050 \textleading =
12pt
11052 \internalpagesizes{7.5in
}{5in
}%
11054 {\bindingoffset}{16pt
}%
11057 \lispnarrowing =
0.3in
11060 \contentsrightmargin =
0pt
11061 \defbodyindent =
.5cm
11064 % Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
11065 % (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
11066 \def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs =
1
11067 \parskip =
1.5pt plus
1pt
11068 \textleading =
12pt
11070 \internalpagesizes{7.4in
}{4.8in
}%
11075 \lispnarrowing =
0.25in
11078 \contentsrightmargin =
0pt
11079 \defbodyindent =
.4cm
11082 % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
11083 \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs =
1
11084 \parskip =
3pt plus
2pt minus
1pt
11085 \textleading =
13.2pt
11087 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
11088 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
11089 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
11090 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
11091 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
11092 % your texinfo source file like this:
11094 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
11095 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
11097 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt
}{160mm
}% that's 51 lines
11098 {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
11099 {\bindingoffset}{44pt
}%
11104 \contentsrightmargin =
0pt
11105 \defbodyindent =
5mm
11108 % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
11109 % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
11110 % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
11111 \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs =
1
11112 \parskip =
2pt plus
1pt minus
0.1pt
11113 \textleading =
12.5pt
11115 \internalpagesizes{160mm
}{120mm
}%
11116 {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
11117 {\bindingoffset}{8pt
}%
11120 \lispnarrowing =
0.2in
11123 \contentsrightmargin =
0pt
11124 \defbodyindent =
2mm
11125 \tableindent =
12mm
11128 % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
11129 \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs =
1
11131 \internalpagesizes{237mm
}{150mm
}%
11133 {\bindingoffset}{7mm
}%
11136 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
11140 % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
11141 \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs =
1
11143 \internalpagesizes{241mm
}{165mm
}%
11144 {\voffset}{-
2.95mm
}%
11145 {\bindingoffset}{7mm
}%
11150 % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
11151 % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
11152 % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
11154 \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,
\finish}
11155 \def\pagesizesyyy#1,
#2,
#3\finish{{%
11156 \setbox0 =
\hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 >
0pt
\hsize=
#2\relax \fi
11159 \parskip =
3pt plus
2pt minus
1pt
11160 \setleading{\textleading}%
11163 \advance\dimen0 by
\voffset
11166 \advance\dimen2 by
\normaloffset
11168 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
11169 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
11170 {\bindingoffset}{44pt
}%
11171 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
11174 % Set default to letter.
11179 \message{and turning on texinfo input format.
}
11181 \def^^L
{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment
11183 % DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
11186 % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
11187 \catcode`\"=
\other \def\normaldoublequote{"
}
11188 \catcode`\$=
\other \def\normaldollar{$
}%$ font-lock fix
11189 \catcode`\+=
\other \def\normalplus{+
}
11190 \catcode`\<=
\other \def\normalless{<
}
11191 \catcode`\>=
\other \def\normalgreater{>
}
11192 \catcode`\^=
\other \def\normalcaret{^
}
11193 \catcode`
\_=
\other \def\normalunderscore{_
}
11194 \catcode`\|=
\other \def\normalverticalbar{|
}
11195 \catcode`\~=
\other \def\normaltilde{~
}
11197 % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
11198 % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
11199 % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
11201 % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
11202 % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
11203 % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
11204 % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
11206 \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=
0pt
#1\else #2\fi}
11208 % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
11209 % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
11210 % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
11211 % this is not a problem.
11212 \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>
0pt
#1\else #2\fi}
11214 % Set catcodes for Texinfo file
11216 % Active characters for printing the wanted glyph.
11217 % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
11218 % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
11220 \catcode`\"=
\active
11221 \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
11222 \let"=
\activedoublequote
11223 \catcode`\~=
\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ =
\activetilde
11224 \chardef\hatchar=`\^
11225 \catcode`\^=
\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hatchar}} \let^ =
\activehat
11227 \catcode`
\_=
\active
11228 \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
11229 \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em
\vbox{\hrule width
.3em height
.1ex
}\kern .07em
}
11232 \catcode`\|=
\active \def|
{{\tt\char124}}
11235 \catcode`\<=
\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< =
\activeless
11237 \catcode`\>=
\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> =
\activegtr
11238 \catcode`\+=
\active \def+
{{\tt \char 43}}
11239 \catcode`\$=
\active \def$
{\ifusingit{{\sl\$
}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
11240 \catcode`\-=
\active \let-=
\normaldash
11243 % used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page
11244 % breaks in the middle of an @tex block.
11245 \def\texinfochars{%
11246 \let< =
\activeless
11248 \let~ =
\activetilde
11250 \markupsetuplqdefault \markupsetuprqdefault
11252 \let\i =
\smartitalic
11253 % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too.
11256 % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
11258 \def\turnoffactive{%
11259 \normalturnoffactive
11265 % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
11267 \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
11268 \global\let\rawbackslashxx=
\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work
11270 % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
11271 % \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
11272 {\catcode`\\=
\other @gdef@realbackslash
{\
} @gdef@doublebackslash
{\\
}}
11274 % In Texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
11275 % in fixed width font.
11276 \catcode`\\=
\active % @ for escape char from now on.
11278 % Print a typewriter backslash. For math mode, we can't simply use
11279 % \backslashcurfont: the story here is that in math mode, the \char
11280 % of \backslashcurfont ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol
11281 % font (because \char in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex
11282 % sets \mathcode`\\="026E). Hence we use an explicit \mathchar,
11283 % which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam;
11284 % ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the
11285 % usual hex value because it has already been made active.
11287 @def@ttbackslash
{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi
}}
11288 @let@backslashchar = @ttbackslash
% @backslashchar{} is for user documents.
11290 % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
11291 % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
11292 % catcode other. We switch back and forth between these.
11293 @gdef@rawbackslash
{@let\=@backslashcurfont
}
11294 @gdef@otherbackslash
{@let\=@realbackslash
}
11296 % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
11297 % the literal character `\'.
11299 {@catcode`- = @active
11300 @gdef@normalturnoffactive
{%
11301 @passthroughcharacters
11303 @let"=@normaldoublequote
11304 @let$=@normaldollar
%$ font-lock fix
11307 @let>=@normalgreater
11309 @let_=@normalunderscore
11310 @let|=@normalverticalbar
11313 @markupsetuplqdefault
11314 @markupsetuprqdefault
11319 % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
11320 % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
11321 % So turn them off again, and have @fixbackslash turn them back on.
11322 @catcode`+=@other @catcode`@_=@other
11324 % \enablebackslashhack - allow file to begin `\input texinfo'
11326 % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
11327 % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
11329 % If the file did not have a `\input texinfo', then it is turned off after
11330 % the first line; otherwise the first `\' in the file would cause an error.
11331 % This is used on the very last line of this file, texinfo.tex.
11332 % We also use @c to call @fixbackslash, in case ends of lines are hidden.
11335 @catcode`@^^M=
13@gdef@enablebackslashhack
{%
11336 @global@let\ = @eatinput
%
11338 @def@c
{@fixbackslash@c
}%
11339 @def ^^M
{@let^^M@secondlinenl
}%
11340 @gdef @secondlinenl
{@let^^M@thirdlinenl
}%
11341 @gdef @thirdlinenl
{@fixbackslash
}%
11344 {@catcode`@^=
7 @catcode`@^^M=
13%
11345 @gdef@eatinput input texinfo
#1^^M
{@fixbackslash
}}
11347 % Emergency active definition of newline, in case an active newline token
11348 % appears by mistake.
11349 {@catcode`@^=
7 @catcode13=
13%
11350 @gdef@enableemergencynewline
{%
11353 %<warning: active newline>@par%
11357 @gdef@fixbackslash
{%
11358 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @ttbackslash @fi
11359 @catcode13=
5 % regular end of line
11360 @enableemergencynewline
11362 % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
11363 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
11365 @catcode`@_=@active
11367 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
11368 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. This macro, @fixbackslash, gets
11369 % called at the beginning of every Texinfo file. Not opening texinfo.cnf
11370 % directly in this file, texinfo.tex, makes it possible to make a format
11371 % file for Texinfo.
11373 @openin
1 texinfo.cnf
11374 @ifeof
1 @else @input texinfo.cnf @fi
11379 % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
11382 % These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need
11383 % active definitions as the normal characters.
11385 @def@normalquest
{?
}
11386 @def@normalslash
{/
}
11388 % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
11389 % @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line.
11390 @catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp
{&
}
11391 @catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash
{#
}
11392 @catcode`@
% = @other @def@normalpercent{%}
11394 @let @hashchar = @normalhash
11396 @c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
11397 @c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w
{@code
{`foo'
}}. If we
11398 @c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
11399 @c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
11400 @catcode`@'=@active
11401 @catcode`@`=@active
11402 @markupsetuplqdefault
11403 @markupsetuprqdefault
11405 @c Local variables:
11406 @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
11407 @c page-delimiter: "^\\\
\message\\|emacs-page"
11408 @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\
\texinfoversion{"
11409 @c time-stamp-format: "
%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
11410 @c time-stamp-end: "
}"
11416 arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-
0b2efa2ea115
11418 @enablebackslashhack